WO2023138409A1 - Communication method and apparatus based on wireless radio-frequency identification - Google Patents
Communication method and apparatus based on wireless radio-frequency identification Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2023138409A1 WO2023138409A1 PCT/CN2023/070947 CN2023070947W WO2023138409A1 WO 2023138409 A1 WO2023138409 A1 WO 2023138409A1 CN 2023070947 W CN2023070947 W CN 2023070947W WO 2023138409 A1 WO2023138409 A1 WO 2023138409A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- message
- sequence
- tag
- encoding
- threshold
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 412
- 230000006854 communication Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 291
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 290
- 230000015654 memory Effects 0.000 claims description 48
- 238000004590 computer program Methods 0.000 claims description 30
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 claims 1
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 20
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 17
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 9
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000004088 simulation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000010521 absorption reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006978 adaptation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004146 energy storage Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001208 nuclear magnetic resonance pulse sequence Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
- G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
- G06K7/10009—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves
- G06K7/10019—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves resolving collision on the communication channels between simultaneously or concurrently interrogated record carriers.
- G06K7/10029—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves resolving collision on the communication channels between simultaneously or concurrently interrogated record carriers. the collision being resolved in the time domain, e.g. using binary tree search or RFID responses allocated to a random time slot
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K17/00—Methods or arrangements for effecting co-operative working between equipments covered by two or more of main groups G06K1/00 - G06K15/00, e.g. automatic card files incorporating conveying and reading operations
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
- G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
- G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
- G06K7/10009—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves
- G06K7/10019—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves resolving collision on the communication channels between simultaneously or concurrently interrogated record carriers.
- G06K7/10069—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves resolving collision on the communication channels between simultaneously or concurrently interrogated record carriers. the collision being resolved in the frequency domain, e.g. by hopping from one frequency to the other
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
- G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
- G06K7/10009—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves
- G06K7/10198—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves setting parameters for the interrogator, e.g. programming parameters and operating modes
- G06K7/10207—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves setting parameters for the interrogator, e.g. programming parameters and operating modes parameter settings related to power consumption of the interrogator
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
- G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
- G06K7/10009—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves
- G06K7/10198—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves setting parameters for the interrogator, e.g. programming parameters and operating modes
- G06K7/10217—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves setting parameters for the interrogator, e.g. programming parameters and operating modes parameter settings controlling the transmission power of the interrogator
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06K—GRAPHICAL DATA READING; PRESENTATION OF DATA; RECORD CARRIERS; HANDLING RECORD CARRIERS
- G06K7/00—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns
- G06K7/10—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation
- G06K7/10009—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves
- G06K7/10297—Methods or arrangements for sensing record carriers, e.g. for reading patterns by electromagnetic radiation, e.g. optical sensing; by corpuscular radiation sensing by radiation using wavelengths larger than 0.1 mm, e.g. radio-waves or microwaves arrangements for handling protocols designed for non-contact record carriers such as RFIDs NFCs, e.g. ISO/IEC 14443 and 18092
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
- Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
- Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks
Definitions
- the present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device based on radio frequency identification.
- RFID Radio Frequency Identification
- radio frequency identification technology When radio frequency identification technology is applied to the Internet of Things (IoT), it can effectively solve the low power consumption requirement in the Internet of Things.
- the reader can effectively manage and identify the massive tags around it, so as to realize the automatic identification of tags and information sharing.
- the problem of battery replacement or plugging in can be effectively improved.
- the reader sends out radio waves of a specific frequency, and the tag can activate its own processing capability according to the radio wave of the specific frequency, so as to send relevant information of the tag to the reader.
- the present application provides an RFID-based communication method and device, which can improve tag access efficiency.
- the embodiment of the present application provides an RFID-based communication method, the method comprising:
- the tag receives a first message, the first message is used to identify the tag, and the first message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine an encoding mode, or determine an encoding mode based on a sequence obtained by the tag, or determine an encoding mode based on received signal energy strength obtained by the tag; the tag receives a second message, and the second message is used to indicate the tag to report a sequence; the tag sends a third message to the reader based on the first encoding mode, and the third message includes the first sequence.
- the encoding method is determined by indicating information, so that the tags located in the same time unit adopt different encoding methods as much as possible, so that the reader can effectively recover messages from different tags, effectively improve the situation of discarding information due to collisions, and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
- the method further includes: the tag receives an acknowledgment (acknowledge, ACK) message from the reader, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences; the tag sends identification information of the tag to the reader based on the first encoding manner.
- ACK acknowledgment
- the tag sends identification information of the tag to the reader based on the first encoding manner.
- the encoding method used by the tag to send the third message is the same as the encoding method used when sending the identification information. Therefore, the tag determines the first encoding method through the indication information, and can send the third message and identification information through the first encoding method.
- the sequence obtained by the tag includes at least one of the following: the first sequence, the second sequence or a reference sequence.
- the tag can determine the coding method based on the sequence that it can obtain, so that each tag can determine the coding method based on the sequence that it can obtain as much as possible. Furthermore, tags that select the same time unit use different encoding methods to send the third message or identification information as much as possible, so as to further improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
- the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the sequence obtained by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the x and the y are positive integers; The length of the second sequence, the i and the j are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the p-th bit and the q-th bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the x-th bit and the y-th bit in the comparison result of the second
- the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength acquired by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy intensity of the second message and a preset threshold.
- the first encoding manner is determined based on any of the following:
- the first encoding method is determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, the m and the n are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the i bit and the j bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers; the first encoding method is based on the p bit and the q bit in the reference sequence It is determined that the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, the p and the q are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to
- the first message further includes at least one of start position information, length information, or a second sequence
- the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence
- the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence
- a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- the first message further includes start position information, length information, and a second sequence
- the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence
- the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence
- a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on radio frequency identification RFID, the method comprising:
- the reader sends a first message, the first message is used to identify the tag, and the first message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine the encoding mode, or determine the encoding mode based on the sequence obtained by the tag, or determine the encoding mode based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the tag; the reader sends a second message, and the second message is used to indicate the sequence reported by the tag; the reader receives a third message from the tag, the third message includes the first sequence, and the encoding mode of the third message includes the first encoding mode.
- the receiving the third message from the tag by the reader includes: receiving the third message sent by at least two tags by the reader, and at least two of the tags use different encoding methods when sending the third message.
- the method further includes: the reader sends an acknowledgment ACK message, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences; and the reader receives the identification information of the tag.
- the reader may send an ACK message to a tag, and the ACK message includes a first sequence.
- the reader may send ACK messages to at least two tags respectively, where the ACK messages are used to confirm multiple first sequences.
- the reader sends ACK messages to at least two tags, the reader can respectively receive the identification information sent by the at least two tags.
- the sequence obtained by the tag includes at least one of the following: the first sequence, the second sequence or a reference sequence.
- the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the sequence obtained by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the m and the n are positive integers; The length of the second sequence, the i and the j are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the p-th bit and the q-th bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the x-th bit and the y-th bit in the comparison result of the second
- the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength acquired by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy intensity of the second message and a preset threshold.
- the first encoding manner is determined based on any of the following:
- the first encoding method is determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, the m and the n are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the i bit and the j bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers; the first encoding method is based on the p bit and the q bit in the reference sequence It is determined that the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, the p and the q are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to
- the first message further includes at least one of start position information, length information, or a second sequence
- the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence
- the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence
- a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- the first message further includes start position information, length information, and a second sequence
- the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence
- the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence
- a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication device, configured to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
- the second communication device includes a unit for performing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
- the second communication device may include a tag.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, configured to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
- the first communication device includes a unit for performing the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
- the first communication device may include a reader or a chip or a chip system disposed in the reader.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication device, where the second communication device includes a processor, configured to execute the method described in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
- the processor is used to execute a program stored in the memory, and when the program is executed, the method shown in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect is executed.
- the memory is located outside the second communication device.
- the memory is located in the second communication device.
- the processor and the memory may also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory may also be integrated together.
- the second communication device further includes a transceiver, where the transceiver is configured to receive a signal or send a signal.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, where the first communication device includes a processor, configured to execute the method described in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
- the processor is used to execute the program stored in the memory, and when the program is executed, the method shown in the above second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect is executed.
- the memory is located outside the first communication device.
- the memory is located in the first communication device.
- the processor and the memory may also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory may also be integrated together.
- the first communication device further includes a transceiver, where the transceiver is configured to receive a signal or send a signal.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication device, the second communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, the logic circuit is coupled to the interface; the interface is used to input the first message and the second message; the interface is also used to output the third message.
- the interface is further configured to input an ACK message and output identification information of the second communication device.
- the logic circuit is configured to obtain the third message according to the input first message and the second message.
- the logic circuit is further configured to acquire identification information according to the input ACK message.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, the first communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, the logic circuit is coupled to the interface; the interface is used to output a first message and a second message, and the interface is also used to input a third message.
- logic circuit can be used to acquire the first message and the second message.
- the interface is further configured to output an ACK message and input tag identification information.
- the logic circuit can be used to obtain the ACK message.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store a computer program, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect is executed.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store a computer program, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect is executed.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or computer code, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect is executed.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or computer code, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect is executed.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program.
- the computer program When the computer program is run on a computer, the method shown in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect is executed.
- an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program.
- the computer program When the computer program is run on a computer, the method shown in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect is executed.
- the embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication system, the wireless communication system includes a tag and a reader, the tag is used to execute the method shown in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, and the reader is used to execute the method shown in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a radio frequency identification system provided by an embodiment of the present application
- Fig. 2a is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 2b is an interactive schematic diagram of another RFID-based communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 3 is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- Figure 4a and Figure 4b are schematic diagrams of a coding method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram between a coding method and a carrier frequency provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- FIG. 5 is an interactive schematic diagram of another RFID-based communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- 6 to 8 are schematic structural diagrams of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- an embodiment means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of the present application.
- the occurrences of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are separate or alternative embodiments mutually exclusive of other embodiments. It is understood explicitly and implicitly by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein can be combined with other embodiments.
- At least one (item) refers to one or more
- “multiple” refers to two or more
- “at least two (items)” refers to two or three and more than three
- “and/or” is used to describe the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships.
- the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an “or” relationship.
- “At least one of the following” or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items.
- at least one item (unit) of a, b or c may represent: a, b, c, "a and b", “a and c", “b and c", or "a and b and c".
- both ends of the transceiver are active (such as plug-in or battery) devices.
- the sending end is active and the receiving end is passive.
- a transmitter can be used to transmit radio waves to activate a receiver so that the receiver can transmit a signal.
- the transmitting end transmits radio frequency energy by transmitting a radio frequency carrier, thereby activating the receiving end.
- the activated receiving end can continue to receive the downlink message sent by the sending end, and make an uplink response (such as sending its own identification information to the sending end).
- the sending end still continues to transmit the radio frequency carrier, and the receiving end adjusts its antenna impedance to produce a state of matching or not matching with the radio frequency carrier.
- the radio frequency carriers transmitted by the sending end may be absorbed or reflected by different receiving ends, so that the sending end can obtain the fluctuation in the size of the echo signal caused by the absorption or reflection of the receiving end in the echo signal, and this change can carry uplink messages (such as uplink messages including RN16 or uplink messages including EPC, etc.).
- uplink messages such as uplink messages including RN16 or uplink messages including EPC, etc.
- the sending end may include a reader (also called an RFID reader), and the receiving end includes a tag (also called an RFID tag).
- a reader also called an RFID reader
- the receiving end includes a tag (also called an RFID tag).
- Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a radio frequency identification system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the RFID system includes a reader 101 and a tag 102.
- the reader 101 may be an active device
- the tag 102 may be a passive device, a semi-active device or an active device.
- a passive tag can be understood as the tag does not include a radio frequency processor, and sends an uplink message through back reflection communication.
- a semi-active tag can be understood as the tag does not include a radio frequency processor, but includes a power supply or plug-in, etc., and sends uplink messages through back reflection communication.
- An active tag can be understood as the tag includes a radio frequency processor, including a power supply or plug-in, etc., and sends uplink messages through back reflection communication. Compared with semi-active tags, active tags can increase the power of the transmitted signal. Alternatively, the power of the transmitted signal of an active tag may be boosted relative to a passive tag. In the embodiment of the present application, the direction in which the reader sends signals to the tags is called downlink, and the direction in which the tags send signals to the readers is called uplink.
- Fig. 1 only exemplarily shows three labels, but it should not be understood as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
- the label 102 may include a chip, a bus card, a bank card, a printed label, or a work card, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific product form of the label. It can be understood that the label shown in the embodiment of the present application can also be directly embedded in the paper, so that the paper can be pasted on the item, so as to facilitate identification or management of the item by the reader.
- the reader 101 activates the tag 102 by transmitting a radio frequency signal.
- the tag 102 After the tag 102 is activated, it sends an uplink message to the reader 101 according to the downlink message it receives.
- the radio frequency signal shown here may also be called a radio frequency carrier, carrier wave, electromagnetic wave, or radio wave, and the specific name of the radio frequency signal is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the reader 101 can automatically identify the tag 102 through a radio frequency signal, and obtain relevant information.
- the reader 101 may be used to manage and/or identify surrounding tags 102 .
- the reader 101 can be used to report the relevant information it receives from the tag 102 (such as the identification information of the tag 102, etc.) to a central server or database (the central server or database can be used to store the relevant information of the tag or identify the location of the tag, etc.).
- the reader 101 may automatically identify or share information on the tag 102 according to the relevant information it receives from the tag 102 . Instructions on readers and tags are not listed here.
- the radio frequency identification system shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the Internet of Things, the narrowband Internet of Things, the Internet of Vehicles, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific application of the radio frequency identification system.
- the radio frequency identification system shown in Figure 1 can be applied to logistics management, manufacturing, airline luggage handling, express package handling, document tracking, library management, animal identification, sports timing, access control (such as electronic ticket control), automatic road toll collection, etc., and will not be listed here.
- Fig. 2a is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the reader sends out a downlink message for activating the tag, and the downlink message may also be called a downlink message frame or the like.
- the frame header of the downlink message frame includes a blank carrier, which is used to activate the tag. After the tag is activated, its internal circuits and chips start to work, such as decoding the downlink message frame it receives.
- the reader After the tag completes the downlink reception, the reader still continues to send blank carrier waves to maintain the energy supply of the tag, and enables the tag to modulate the uplink message prepared by itself onto the carrier wave continuously sent by the reader, so as to send it out through back reflection.
- the reader After receiving the uplink message from the tag, the reader sends an acknowledgment message to the tag, so that after the tag decodes the acknowledgment message, it sends the tag's identification information to the reader.
- the reader can identify or manage the tag according to the identification information of the tag.
- EPC-Gen2 UHF electronic product code generation-2 ultra high frequency
- This protocol defines the RFID link and media access layer standards of 860MHz to 920MHz.
- the EPC-Gen2 UHF protocol uses a dynamic time unit to enable tag access. That is, there is a polling communication process between the reader and the tag. Since the time unit shown in the embodiment of the present application may include a slot, the above dynamic time unit may also be called a dynamic framed slotted Aloha (DFSA).
- DFSA dynamic framed slotted Aloha
- Fig. 2b is an interactive schematic diagram of another RFID-based communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the reader may send a select message in the form of broadcast, and the select message may be used to select a tag with certain characteristics, so that the reader communicates with the tag with certain characteristics. That is, the selection message can be used to identify the tag. For example, the tag can know whether it interacts with the reader through the selection message.
- the content of the selection message may be as shown in Table 1.
- the instruction field is used to indicate the frame type of the selection message, for example, the frame type of the selection message may be 1010 .
- the target field is used to indicate inventoried. For example, when the value of the target field is 000, it means that the selected marked disk is S0. For another example, when the value of the target field is 001, it means that the selected marked disk is S1. For another example, when the value of the target field is 010, it means that the selected marked disk is S2. For another example, when the value of the target field is 011, it means that the selected marked disk is S3. For another example, when the value of the target field is 100, it means that the selected marked disk is SL.
- the value of the target field is any one of 101, 110 or 111
- the value of the target field in the selection message is reserved as a bit (reserved for use, RFU) available in the future.
- RFU reserved for use
- the action (action) field is used to indicate whether the matching tag confirms or cancels the SL flag, or indicates whether to set the disked flag.
- the membank field is used to indicate that a mask (may also be referred to as a mask) is applied to electronic product code (electronic product code, EPC), tag identification (tagidentification, TID), text type or a single text.
- EPC electronic product code
- tag identification tagidentification
- TID tag identification
- text type a single text.
- the value of the storage body field is 00, it may indicate that the memory content that the tag subsequently searches for is a text type (file type).
- the value of the storage body field is 01, it may indicate that the memory content to be searched by the tag subsequently is EPC.
- the value of the storage body field when the value of the storage body field is 10, it may indicate that the memory content to be searched by the tag subsequently is TID. As another example, when the value of the storage body field is 11, it may indicate that the memory content that the tag subsequently searches for is a single text (such as file_0).
- the pointer (pointer) field is used to indicate the starting position of the data intercepted by the tag. According to the pointer field and the storage body field, the tag can start to intercept data from the content indicated by the storage body field from the starting position indicated by the pointer field.
- the length (length) field is used to indicate the length of data intercepted from the starting position indicated by the pointer field.
- the tag can intercept data of length length from the memory content indicated by the storage body field according to the starting position indicated by the pointer field.
- the mask (mask) field is used to indicate the mask sequence set by the reader, and the mask sequence is used for comparison with the data intercepted by the tag, thereby generating a comparison result of length.
- the comparison result meets a certain condition, it means that the tag is the tag selected by the reader.
- the certain condition shown above may be set by the reader, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific content of the certain condition.
- the memory field can be used to instruct the tag to find its memory content, so as to compare its memory content with the sequence indicated by the mask field.
- the comparison method is to start from the position indicated by the pointer field, take the length indicated by the length field, and compare the extracted sequence with the sequence indicated by the mask field. When the comparison result meets certain conditions, it means that the tag is selected by the selection message.
- the truncate (truncate) field is used to indicate whether the EPC returned by the tag is a truncated EPC.
- a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) may be used to verify the selection message.
- the bit length of the CRC in the selection message may be 16 bits.
- a random parameter is set by the reader, such as the random parameter can be represented by Q, and the Q can be used to indicate the number of time units included in the polling process, such as including 2 Q -1 time units.
- the Q can also be used to indicate the number of polls between the reader and the tag, for example, 2 Q ⁇ 1 polls are included.
- the polling shown in the embodiment of the present application refers to the completion of the interaction process between the reader and the tag as shown in Figure 2a through polling, and/or the completion of the interaction process within a time unit between the reader and the tag as shown in Figure 2b through polling. It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the duration of one time unit.
- a time unit may also be called a time slot or a time unit, and the specific name of the time unit is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the reader may send a query message in the form of broadcast (the query message is represented by query in FIG. 2b), and the query message includes random parameters.
- the content of the inquiry message may be as shown in Table 2a.
- the command (command) field is used to indicate the frame type of the inquiry message, for example, the frame type of the inquiry message may be 1000.
- the division ratio (division ratio, DR) is used to indicate the connection frequency of the tag and reader communication.
- M is used to indicate the coding mode and information rate adopted by the tag when sending the uplink message. It can be understood that M can also be used to represent the number of cycles in each symbol (eg, bit).
- the label extension field is used to indicate whether the uplink preamble of the label includes pilot frequency.
- the TRext occupies 1 bit. For example, when the value of TRext is 0, it means that the pilot is not used; for another example, when the value of TRext is 1, it means that the pilot is used. It can be understood that the tag extension field may also be called a TRext field, or a tag response extend field, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the English name of the tag extension field.
- the selection field is used to select the tag set that responds to the inquiry message, and occupies 2 bits.
- the session field is used to indicate the session type participating in the polling process tag, occupying 2 bits. For example, when the value of the call field is 00, it indicates that the call type is S0. For another example, when the value of the call field is 01, it indicates that the call type is S1. For another example, when the value of the call field is 10, it indicates that the call type is S2. For another example, when the value of the call field is 11, it indicates that the call type is S3.
- the target (target) field is used to indicate that the disked flag of the tag participating in the polling process is A or B, and occupies 1 bit.
- Q represents the number of polling time units, and the Q occupies 4 bits, and the 4 bits can be used to indicate any one of 0-15.
- a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) occupies 5 bits.
- the tag can determine the total number of time units according to the value of Q, randomly generate a sequence, and randomly select a time unit among 2 Q -1 time units.
- the tag can randomly generate a sequence with a bit length of 16, for example, the sequence can include a 16-bit random number (random number 16, RN16) (RN16 as shown in Figure 2b, or RN16 as shown in Table 3). It can be understood that the RN16 shown above may also be called a pseudo-random number.
- each of the multiple tags can randomly generate a sequence, and randomly select a time unit among 2 Q ⁇ 1 time units.
- Fig. 2b only exemplarily shows two tags, such as a first tag and a second tag, and the number of tags shown in Fig. 2b should not be construed as limiting the embodiment of the present application.
- the reader can send a query message in the form of broadcast (query or queryreq as shown in Figure 2b), thus, when the time unit selected by the tag is consistent with the time unit where the query message is located, the tag can send an uplink message including RN16 to the reader after receiving the query message.
- the query messages shown in Table 2b can also be called query repeat messages, or query repeat messages, etc.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific names of the messages shown in Table 2b.
- the content of the query repeat (queryreq) message may be as shown in Table 2b.
- the instruction field is used to indicate the frame type of the query repetition message, for example, the frame type of the query message may be 00.
- the call field is used to indicate the call type. If the call type of the query repeat message is inconsistent with the call type in the previously received query message, the tag ignores the query repeat message. It can be understood that, for the description of the conversation field, reference may be made to the conversation field shown in Table 2a, which will not be described in detail here.
- the content of the uplink message including RN16 may be as shown in Table 3.
- bit length of the uplink message is 16 (the number of bits shown in Table 3 is 16), and the frame type of the uplink message is RN16.
- the reader can send an acknowledgment (acknowledge, ACK) message to the tag, so that the tag can send its identification information to the reader after receiving the ACK message.
- the identification information may include an electronic product code (electronic product code, EPC), an extended product code (extended product code, XPC) or a tag identification (tag identification, TID) and the like.
- EPC electronic product code
- XPC extended product code
- tag identification tag identification
- the content of the ACK message may be as shown in Table 4.
- the instruction field is used to indicate the frame type of the ACK message, for example, the frame type of the ACK message may be 01.
- the RN indicates that the ACK message confirms the RN16 indicated by the random number (random number, RN) field.
- bit length of the ACK message is 2, and the frame type of the ACK message is 01.
- the time unit randomly selected by the first tag is the first time unit, then in the first time unit, the first tag can send an uplink message including RN16 to the reader, receive the ACK message sent by the reader, and send an EPC to the reader, thus completing a poll.
- the time unit randomly selected by the second tag is the second time unit. In the second time unit, the second tag can send an uplink message including RN16 to the reader, receive the ACK message sent by the reader, and send an EPC to the reader.
- the multiple tags will collide when they send uplink messages to the reader due to the same frequency and simultaneous reasons. That is to say, in one time unit, when multiple tags send uplink messages to the reader on the same frequency domain resource, the multiple messages will collide. Therefore, in the one time unit, the reader cannot parse the uplink message due to a collision, and all the information in the one time unit is discarded.
- the ACK message shown in Table 4 can only carry the RN16 of one tag, that is, the reader cannot notify multiple tags that their uplink messages have been received correctly, and cannot make multiple tags report their EPC information after receiving the ACK message.
- the Q value does not match the total number of tags: if the Q value is small, more tags will choose the same time unit, resulting in aggravated collisions.
- the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which can effectively improve the situation where multiple tags select the same time unit and collide, causing all information in the time unit to be discarded, thereby not only effectively improving the access efficiency of the radio frequency identification system, but also effectively improving the utilization rate of time domain resources.
- the method provided in the embodiment of the present application avoids as much as possible that the multiple tags use the same encoding mode.
- the situation of collision when the plurality of tags send uplink messages can be effectively improved, that is, the effect that the plurality of tags send uplink messages concurrently without collision can be achieved.
- Fig. 3 is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the communication method can be applied to a radio frequency identification system as shown in FIG. 1 .
- the communication method may be applied to a system including a first communication device and a second communication device, the first communication device may include a reader or a chip applied in the reader, and the second communication device may include a tag.
- the first communication device may include an active network device (such as an active base station), and the second communication device may include a passive terminal, a semi-active terminal, or an active terminal. It can be understood that for descriptions about passive terminals, semi-active terminals, and active terminals, reference may be made to the description about tags in FIG. 1 , and they will not be listed here. As long as the first communication device and the second communication device need to interact through back reflection communication, it falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application.
- the method includes:
- the first communication device sends a first message, where the first message is used to identify the second communication device.
- the second communication device receives the first message.
- the first message includes at least one item of indication information, starting position information, length information or the second sequence.
- the indication information may be used to instruct the second communication device to randomly determine the coding mode, or to determine the coding mode based on the sequence obtained by the second communication device, or to determine the coding mode based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the second communication device.
- the indication information shown above may also be collectively referred to as: the indication information is used to instruct the second communication apparatus to determine the first encoding manner according to a preset rule.
- the starting position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, which can be used for comparison with the second sequence, and the comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the second communication device.
- the second telecommunications device may determine whether it interacts (or polls) with the first telecommunications device based on the starting location information, the length information and the second sequence.
- the starting position information indicates the starting position of the data intercepted by the second communication device
- the length information indicates the length of the data intercepted by the second communication device.
- the second communication device can intercept a certain length of data (ie, a reference sequence) from the memory content based on the start position indicated by the start position information, and the certain length is indicated by the length information.
- the starting position information and the length information may be used to instruct the second communication device to start extracting the reference sequence from the memory content based on the starting position indicated by the starting position information, and the length of the reference sequence is determined by the length information.
- the memory content may include any one of text type (file type), EPC, TID or a single text (such as file_0).
- the memory content may be preset by the first communication device, and then the first communication device broadcasts the memory content in a broadcast manner.
- memory content may be indicated by storage volume information.
- the first message may also include storage volume information, where the storage volume information is used to indicate storage volume content.
- the first message includes starting location information.
- the length and/or the second sequence of the data intercepted by the second communication device may be preset, such as defined by a standard, or preset by the first communication device, and then broadcast the length information and/or the second sequence through a broadcast message.
- the first message includes length information.
- the starting position information and/or the second sequence required by the second communication device may be preset, such as defined by a standard, or preset by the first communication device, and then broadcast the starting position information and/or the second sequence through a broadcast message.
- the first message includes starting position information and length information.
- the second communication device can determine the reference sequence according to the start position information and the length information included in the first message.
- the second sequence can be preset.
- the first message includes starting position information, length information and a second sequence.
- the second communication device may autonomously determine the first encoding method based on preset rules (eg, determine the first encoding method based on any one of the preset rules). Meanwhile, the second communication device does not determine the coding mode based on M indicated in the second message.
- preset rules eg, determine the first encoding method based on any one of the preset rules.
- the first message includes at least one item of starting position information, length information, or the second sequence, and the first message includes indication information.
- the second communication device can clearly know that it can determine the first encoding method based on preset rules (such as determining the first encoding method based on any rule in the preset rules). Meanwhile, the second communication device may not determine the encoding mode based on M indicated in the second message.
- the first message includes starting position information, length information, the second sequence and indication information.
- the value of the indication information included in the first message may be any one of 101, 110 or 111.
- the indication information may be located in a target (target) field in the first message, and when the value of the target field is any one of 000, 001, 010, 011 or 100, the target field may be used to indicate a disk already marked.
- the target field can be used to instruct the second communication device to determine the first coding method based on preset rules (such as the second communication device randomly determines the first coding method, or determines the first coding method based on the sequence obtained by the second communication device, or determines the first coding method based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the second communication device).
- the encoding method of each tag is the same.
- the indication information shown in the embodiment of the present application is used to indicate that a multi-coding mode is enabled, or the indication information is used to indicate that the second communication device can independently determine a coding mode, or the indication information is used to indicate the interaction of multiple coding modes, or the indication information is used to indicate that at least two second communication devices are allowed to use different coding modes.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the description of the instruction information, as long as the second communication device can independently determine the encoding method based on the instruction information, or, based on the instruction information, the encoding methods used by at least two second communication devices are different, all belong to the protection scope of the embodiment of the application.
- the description of the first message refers to the above description of Table 1.
- the start position information refers to the description of the pointer field shown in Table 1
- the length information refers to the description of the length field shown in Table 1
- the second sequence refers to the description of the mask field shown in Table 1
- the storage bank information refers to the description of the storage bank field shown in Table 1, etc., which will not be described in detail here.
- the first message shown above includes at least one item of indication information, starting position information, length information or the second sequence, and can also be understood as: the first message includes a target field, and the value of the target field is any one of 101, 110 or 111; a pointer field; at least one of a length field or a mask field.
- the first message includes a target field, and the value of the target field is any one of 101, 110 or 111; a pointer field; at least one of a length field or a mask field.
- the first communication device sends a second message, where the second message is used to instruct the second communication device to report a sequence.
- the second communication device receives the second message.
- the first communication device may send the second message in a broadcast form.
- the first communication device may broadcast the second message to at least two second communication devices.
- the second message includes information used to indicate the Q value, and the Q value may be used to indicate the number of time units.
- the second communication device may know that it needs to randomly select a time unit in 2Q -1 time units, so as to perform information interaction with the first communication device in the time unit.
- the second message may also be called a query message or a query repeat message (such as including query or queryreq shown in FIG. 2b ).
- query message or a query repeat message (such as including query or queryreq shown in FIG. 2b ).
- Table 2a and/or Table 2b For the description of the second message, reference may be made to the description shown in Table 2a and/or Table 2b.
- the second communication device may not determine the encoding mode based on the value of M. Instead, the encoding method is determined based on preset rules. Exemplarily, the second communication device may know explicitly based on the indication information in the first message that it does not need to determine the encoding mode based on the value of M.
- the second communication device sends a third message to the first communication device based on the first encoding manner, where the third message includes the first sequence.
- the first communication device receives the third message.
- the first encoding manner may be determined based on preset rules.
- the first coding method is determined based on any one or more of the following: the first coding method is randomly determined by the second communication device; the first coding method is determined based on the sequence obtained by the second communication device; the first coding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the second communication device.
- the second communication device may send the third message based on the first encoding method in the first time unit.
- the bit length of the first sequence may be 16 bits, or greater than 16 bits (such as 12 bits or 8 bits, etc.), or less than 16 bits (such as 20 bits or 24 bits), etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. It can be understood that, for the description about the third message, reference may also be made to the uplink messages shown in Table 3, which will not be described in detail here.
- the encoding method adopted by the second communication device when sending the uplink message is determined based on the value of M in the inquiry message.
- the first encoding method adopted by the second communication device when sending the third message is determined based on preset rules.
- the encoding method adopted by each tag is the same.
- the second communication device since the second communication device can determine the encoding method autonomously based on preset rules, there may be at least two second communication devices that use different encoding methods.
- the encoding methods adopted by the at least two second communication devices may be different, or the encoding methods adopted by the at least two second communication devices are different. It can be understood that, since the second communication device generates the third message through the baseband processor, the encoding manner shown in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as a baseband encoding manner.
- At least two second communication devices that send the third message to the first communication device use different encoding methods.
- the first communication device can use different filtering methods to decode the third message, so that the first communication device can recover each third message.
- the encoding methods adopted by the two second communication devices are different.
- the encoding method includes four encoding methods as an example. When there are more types of encoding methods, the number of second communication devices that are allowed to send the third message within the same time unit is also greater.
- the following scheme may also exist in the method shown in the embodiment of the present application: in the same time unit, at least two second communication devices that send the third message to the first communication device use the same encoding method.
- there may be at least two second communication devices using the same coding method in the same time unit but since each second communication device determines the coding method based on preset rules, there is a high possibility that in the same time unit, at least two second communication devices use different coding methods. Therefore, using the method shown in the embodiment of the present application reduces the collisions caused by different second communication devices due to the same frequency at the same time as much as possible, thereby improving the access efficiency of the second communication device.
- the sequences obtained by each tag are likely to be different.
- the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can improve as much as possible the situation that at least two second communication devices use the same encoding mode in the same time unit. It can be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the preset rules adopted by different second communication devices may be the same.
- different second communication devices can randomly determine the encoding method; or, different second communication devices can determine the encoding method based on the first sequence obtained respectively; or, different second communication devices can determine the encoding method based on the second sequence obtained respectively; or, different second communication devices can determine the encoding method based on the reference sequence obtained respectively;
- different second communication devices may also use different preset rules to determine the encoding manner.
- the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can effectively improve the problem of collision when two or more second communication devices simultaneously access the system and send the third message in the same time unit. Based on the method shown in FIG. 2b, the messages in the same time unit cannot be parsed due to the collision of the second communication device, resulting in discarding all the information in this time unit, and at the same time, this time unit will also be invalidated. However, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application ensures that the second communication device uses different encoding methods when sending the third message as much as possible, so as to achieve the effect of concurrent uplink without collision and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
- the method shown in FIG. 3 further includes step 304 and step 305 .
- the first communications apparatus sends an ACK message to the second communications apparatus, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more first sequences.
- the second communication device receives the ACK message.
- the ACK message is used to confirm a first sequence. For example, if the time unit randomly selected by a second communication device is the same as the time unit of the second message sent by the first communication device, the first communication device may confirm the third message sent by the second communication device, or confirm the first sequence sent by the second communication device.
- the ACK message is used to confirm at least two first sequences (also referred to as multiple first sequences). For example, the time unit randomly selected by at least two second communication devices is the same as the time unit of the second message sent by the first communication device, then the first communication device may confirm the first sequence sent by the at least two second communication devices.
- the content of the ACK message may be as shown in Table 5.
- the bit length of the ACK message may be fixed.
- the bit length of the ACK message may be determined based on the length of the first sequence included in the third message and a reference value (such as may be expressed as Tn).
- the reference value may be the type of encoding method.
- the reference value may be 4.
- the reference value may be the number of second communication devices allowed to send an uplink message (eg, including a third message or an ACK message) in a time unit.
- the value of the reference value is not limited.
- the bit length of the ACK message may be 64 bits.
- the ACK message may confirm the third message sent by each of the four second communication devices.
- the second communication devices such as a second communication device
- the ACK message may confirm the correctly decoded third message.
- the 16 vacant bits in the ACK message can be filled with fixed values.
- the bit length of the ACK message may not be fixed, but changes with the number of third messages acknowledged by the first communication device.
- the ACK message since the bit length of the ACK message is not fixed, in order to enable the second communication device to correctly decode the ACK message, the ACK message may further include information indicating the bit length of the ACK message.
- RN16 ( T1 ), RN16 ( T2 ) to RN16 ( Tn ) shown in Table 5 represent different RN16 of the second communication device.
- the ACK message shown in the embodiment of the present application may also be called an acknowledgment message.
- the second communication device sends the identification information of the second communication device to the first communication device based on the first encoding manner.
- the first communication device receives the identification information.
- the identification information of the second communication device may include EPC, XPC, or TID, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the second communication device may independently decide to send the EPC or XPC to the first communication device.
- the second communication device may also send information indicating EPC or XPC to the first communication device, so that the first communication device may know whether the identification information sent by the second communication device is EPC or XPC based on the information indicating EPC or XPC.
- the second communication device may send identification information to the first communication device based on the first encoding manner. That is to say, the encoding manner of sending the third message by the second communication device is the same as the encoding manner of sending the identification information. Meanwhile, the time unit at which the second communication device sends the third message is the same as the time unit at which the identification information is sent.
- the encoding method is determined by indicating information, so that the second communication devices located in the same time unit adopt different encoding methods as much as possible, so that the first communication device can effectively recover messages from different second communication devices, effectively improve the situation of discarding information due to collisions, and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
- the encoding method involved in the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail by taking the first communication device including a reader and the second communication device including a tag as an example.
- the encoding method involved in the communication method shown in FIG. 3 refer to the following, and at the same time, refer to FIG. 3 for the communication method involved in the encoding method shown below, which will not be described in detail below.
- the time unit shown in the embodiment of the present application means that the reader and the tag can complete the interaction process shown in FIG. 3 within one time unit; or, the reader and the tag can complete one polling within one time unit. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific duration of one time unit.
- the interaction between the reader and the tag enables the reader to obtain the identification information of the tag, it can be said that this interaction is within one time unit.
- the reader may send a second message to the tag, the tag sends a third message to the reader, then the reader sends an ACK message to the tag, and the tag sends the tag's identification information to the reader.
- the above-mentioned second message, third message, ACK message and identification information may be called one polling, which is completed within one time unit. It can be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, there is no limitation on whether the sending time or the receiving time of the first message needs to be within one time unit. For the description of time units reference can also be made to the above in relation to Figures 2a and 2b.
- different encoding methods for different tags shown below may be for the same time unit. If the time units selected by the first label and the second label are the same, then in the time unit, the encoding methods determined by the first label and the second label based on preset rules may be different. In this case, by using different encoding methods for the first tag and the second tag, it can effectively ensure that the reader can correctly distinguish the third message of the first tag from the third message of the second tag, or the identification information of the first tag and the identification information of the second tag.
- the different encoding methods shown below for different tags may also be for different time units. If the time units selected by the first tag and the second tag are different, then the first tag and the second tag may use different encoding methods in their selected time units.
- the first label and the second label may also use the same encoding manner.
- the specific encoding methods used by the first label and the second label may be determined based on preset rules, and the description of the preset rules may refer to the following. It can be understood that the above is illustrated with the first tag and the second tag as examples, and the first tag and the second tag can be understood as the second communication device. At the same time, the number of tags that select the same time unit can include 2, 3, or 4, etc.
- the first tag and the second tag shown in the embodiment of the present application should not be interpreted as limiting the embodiment of the present application.
- the following situation may also exist: at least three tags select the same time unit, two of the at least three tags determine the same encoding mode, and the remaining tags determine different encoding modes.
- the reader can still determine the third message and/or identification information sent by the selected tags with different encoding methods.
- the use of different encoding methods by the second communication device can also be understood as follows: the frequency point used by the second communication device is different, or the frequency used by the second communication device is different, or the modulation frequency used by the second communication device is different, or the effect of the subcarrier used by the second communication device is different, or the frequency of the subcarrier used by the second communication device is different, or the baseband spectrum corresponding to the second communication device is different.
- phase of the FMO encoding will be reversed at the boundary of each symbol.
- a phase flip in the middle of the symbol occurs at symbol 0.
- For symbol 1 there will only be one phase flip, at the beginning of the symbol.
- the Miller baseband code is multiplied by a square wave pulse sequence with a specific period to form a Miller subcarrier sequence (also called a subcarrier frequency) as shown in FIG. 4b.
- M the number of square waves included in one symbol, and the square wave includes a high level and a low level.
- M the number of square waves included in one symbol
- M the square wave includes a high level and a low level.
- Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram between a coding method and a carrier frequency provided by an embodiment of the present application.
- the reader sends second messages to the first tag, the second tag and the third tag respectively through the carrier frequency f0.
- the carrier frequency f0 can also be understood as the carrier frequency sent by the reader for tag modulation or reflection.
- the first tag modulates f0 based on miller-2 to obtain the subcarrier frequency f1, then the first tag can send the third message through the subcarrier frequency f1+carrier frequency f0.
- the second tag modulates f0 based on miller-4 to obtain the subcarrier frequency f2, then the second tag can send the third message through the subcarrier frequency f2+carrier frequency f0.
- the third tag obtains the subcarrier frequency f3 based on the miller-8 modulation f0, then the third tag can send the third message through the subcarrier frequency f3+carrier frequency f0. That is to say, when different tags reflect the carrier frequency and modulate their own information to the subcarrier frequency, from the frequency point of view, the modulated information can exist in the form of the subcarrier frequency near the carrier frequency of the reader, and the modulation frequency of the subcarrier is the coding rate of the tag.
- the larger M is, the larger the coding rate is, and the larger the subcarrier frequency is.
- the description of the third message in this embodiment of the present application is also applicable to the identification information, and will not be described in detail here. It can be understood that, for descriptions about the respective time units of the first tag, the second tag, and the third tag, reference may be made to the above, and no further details are given here.
- the center frequencies corresponding to different encoding methods are described below based on simulation results. Based on the pseudo-random sequence, it is FM0 coded or Miller subcarrier modulated, and its bit rate is 80kbps. According to the simulation results, it can be obtained that the bit rates of the four encoding methods are all 80 kbps. At the same time, it can be obtained from the spectrum simulation results:
- the center frequency of the subcarrier is 80kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 160kHz;
- the center frequency of the subcarrier is 160kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 320kHz;
- the center frequency of the subcarrier is 320kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 320kHz;
- the center frequency of the subcarrier is 640kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 320kHz.
- the reader can perform digital filtering respectively, so as to restore the signals of different tags, and then play the role of separating the collision signals.
- the purpose of multi-user access in the same time unit can be achieved. That is to say, if different tags adopt different codes in the uplink, multiple tags can be separated in frequency, so that the reader can receive and decode information of different frequencies at the same time.
- the second communication device when the second communication device sends the third message and/or identification information, it may modulate a square wave with a low information symbol rate by using high-speed Miller coding, where the order or type of Miller coding is M.
- the reader can filter different tags separately, thereby restoring the signals of different tags. In this way, the effect of collision signal separation can be achieved, thereby achieving the purpose of multi-user access in the radio frequency identification system. It should be noted that when the encoding methods are different, it means that the order M of the Miller encoding is different.
- the indication information shown in FIG. 3 and the method for determining the first encoding mode will be described in detail below.
- the indication information shown in Figure 3 can be implemented in the following ways:
- the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to randomly determine the encoding mode. That is to say, the first encoding manner may be randomly determined by the second communication device; or, the first encoding manner may be determined autonomously by the second communication device. That is to say, in the method shown in FIG. 3 , the first coding manner used by the second communication device when sending the third message and/or identification information is randomly determined by it.
- the tag may determine, according to the indication information in the first message, that it can randomly determine the encoding mode without referring to the value of M in the second message to determine the encoding mode.
- the tag can determine the encoding method by itself without referring to the value of M in the second message to determine the encoding method. Therefore, tags (such as two tags, three tags, or four tags, etc.) in the same time unit may determine different encoding methods. Compared with the method shown in FIG. 2b , this implementation mode not only requires less changes, but is as compatible as possible with the method shown in FIG. 2b , and is also simple to implement.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the first sequence. That is to say, the first encoding manner is determined based on the first sequence; or, the second communication device determines the first encoding manner based on the first sequence.
- the first sequence is the sequence that the second communication device needs to report to the first communication device.
- the first sequence is the sequence that the second communication device needs to report to the first communication device.
- the second communication device may determine the coding mode based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence. That is to say, the first coding manner may be determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence. Wherein, m is not equal to n, both m and n are less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and both m and n are positive integers. That is to say, the second communication device may determine the coding mode based on certain two bits in the first sequence.
- the mth bit and the nth bit may be the first bit and the last bit in the first sequence.
- the mth bit and the nth bit are two middle bits in the first sequence. Taking the bit length of the first sequence as 16 bits as an example, the two middle bits may be the 8th bit and the 9th bit. Taking the bit length of the first sequence as 15 bits as an example, the two bits in the middle position may be the 7th bit and the 8th bit, or may be the 8th bit and the 9th bit, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
- the values of the two bits of the mth bit and the nth bit correspond to the encoding manner.
- the value of these two bits is 00, and the corresponding coding mode may be FM0.
- the corresponding encoding method may be miller-2.
- the corresponding encoding method may be miller-4.
- the corresponding encoding method may be miller-8.
- the tag determines the encoding method based on its own RN16, which can reduce the collision probability of different tags in the same time unit as much as possible, and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the energy strength of the received signal. That is to say, the first encoding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength of the second message received by the second communication device; or, the second communication device may determine the first encoding method based on the energy strength of the signal it receives. It can be understood that the received signal energy strength shown in the embodiment of the present application can also be understood as the carrier energy strength of the reader received by the tag.
- the second communication device may determine the coding mode based on a comparison result of the received signal energy strength of the second message with a preset threshold.
- the first coding manner may be determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold.
- the first encoding manner includes FMO. The first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold.
- the tag may select an encoding mode according to the energy intensity (such as represented by P rx ) of the second message it receives.
- the reader sets three energy intensity thresholds such as P 1 , P 2 and P 3 , and P 1 >P 2 >P 3 .
- P rx ⁇ P 1 the corresponding encoding method may be miller-8.
- P 1 >P rx ⁇ P 2 the corresponding encoding method may be miller-4.
- P 2 >P rx ⁇ P 3 the corresponding encoding method may be miller-2.
- P 3 >P rx the corresponding coding mode may be FM0.
- miller-8 has the highest subcarrier frequency and relatively high power consumption.
- the order of power consumption is miller-8>miller-4>miller-2>FM0. Therefore, the larger the value of M is, the more energy the tag needs to receive to send an uplink message. Therefore, through the relationship between the energy intensity and the threshold shown above, the second communication device can send the third message and the identification information in combination with the energy required by itself.
- the reader does not need to explicitly indicate the encoding manner, and the tag determines the encoding manner based on the energy intensity of the signal it receives.
- the modification is small, and the effect of multi-label frequency division multiplexing is achieved, and the utilization rate of time domain resources is improved.
- the indication information is used to indicate to determine the encoding mode based on at least one of the second sequence or the reference sequence. For example, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the second sequence. For another example, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding manner is determined based on the reference sequence. For another example, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence. That is to say, the first coding method may be determined by the second communication device based on the second sequence; or, the first coding method may be determined based on a comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence; or, the first coding method may be determined based on the reference sequence. That is to say, the second communication device determines the first encoding manner based on the second sequence and/or the reference sequence.
- the second sequence may be included in the first message, and the reference sequence may be determined based on starting position information, length information, and memory content.
- the reference sequence may be determined based on starting position information, length information, and memory content.
- the first encoding method is determined based on the i-th bit and the j-th bit in the second sequence, i is not equal to j, i and j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and both are positive integers.
- the first encoding method is determined based on the p-th bit and the q-th bit in the reference sequence, p is not equal to q, both p and q are less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and both are positive integers.
- the first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, x is not equal to y, and both x and y are less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and both are positive integers.
- m and n, i and j, p and q, and x and y shown above are the same.
- m can be equal to i
- n can be equal to j
- m can be equal to j
- x and y are examples including four coding modes, for example, two bits can determine four states, and the four states can correspond to the four coding modes.
- the tag can also determine the coding method based on more bits.
- the tag can determine the encoding mode based on the three bits in the acquired sequence. For example, the tag can determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the first sequence; or, determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the second sequence; or determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the reference sequence; or determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, etc., which will not be listed here.
- the coding method is determined by the number of bits corresponding to the coding method, which is simple to implement, and the tag can quickly determine the coding method in a manner closer to the type of the coding method.
- the first message when the reader sends the first message, the first message will include the second sequence.
- the tag also needs to determine the reference sequence according to the first message. Therefore, by determining the encoding method based on the second sequence or the reference sequence or the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, not only the improvement of the first message is small, but also enables the tag to determine the encoding method.
- the specific content indicated by the indication information shown above may be set by the first communication device, or may also be defined by a standard.
- the first communication device may indicate to the second communication device the specific content of the indication information in the first message through the value of M in the second message.
- M indicated by the first communication device is the same for all second communication devices.
- the value of M corresponds to the content indicated by the indication information. That is, the four values of M, such as 00, 01, 10, and 11, may correspond to the above four implementation manners.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the second communication device can randomly determine the encoding mode.
- the indication information is used to indicate that the second communication device can determine the encoding manner based on the first sequence.
- the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to determine the encoding mode based on the received signal energy strength of the second message it receives.
- the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to determine the encoding manner based on the second sequence.
- the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to determine the encoding mode based on the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence.
- the indication information is used to instruct the second communication apparatus to determine a coding scheme based on the reference sequence. It can be understood that the above-mentioned correspondence between the value of M and the specific content indicated by the indication information is only an example, and should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
- Fig. 5 is an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
- the description about select refer to the first message shown in FIG. 3 , or refer to the description about Table 1 in FIG. 2 b adaptively.
- the description about the query refer to the second message shown in FIG. 3 , or, adaptively refer to the description about Table 2a and/or Table 2b in FIG. 2b.
- RN16(f1), RN16(f2), and RN16(f3) reference may be made to the third message shown in FIG. 3 , or, reference may be made to the description of Table 3 in FIG. 2b.
- RN16(f1) may indicate that the first tag modulates the sending subcarrier frequency to f1, and the first tag sends a message including RN16 through the subcarrier frequency f1 and the carrier frequency f0.
- RN16(f1) may indicate that the first tag modulates the sending subcarrier frequency to f1, and the first tag sends a message including RN16 through the subcarrier frequency f1 and the carrier frequency f0.
- Others are similar and will not be explained here.
- New ACK refer to the ACK message shown in Figure 3, or refer to the description of Table 4 in Figure 2b for adaptation.
- Queryreq refer to the description in FIG. 2b .
- EPC(f1) to EPC(f4) refer to the identification information shown in FIG. 3 , or refer to the description about Table 5 in FIG. 2b.
- the reader can send a select message through broadcast, and the select message can be used to select a tag with fixed characteristics to poll with the reader.
- the select message may be used to select tags with fixed characteristics to enter the inventory process (for example, the reader needs to inventory the tags).
- the first label, the second label and the third label all belong to labels with fixed characteristics. It can be understood that for the description of how to select a tag with a fixed feature through the select message, reference may be made to the above, and details will not be detailed here.
- the first tag, the second tag, and the third tag are determined by the value in the target field in the select message to determine the encoding method based on preset rules; or determine that they can use different encodings for concurrent access; or determine that they can perform frequency division multiplexing concurrent access procedures.
- the reader sends a query message through broadcast, and each tag randomly selects a time unit according to the query message.
- the time units selected by the first label and the second label are the same, and both are in the time unit where the query message is located.
- the first label and the second label can determine the encoding method based on a preset rule, and at the same time, the encoding methods determined by the first label and the second label are different.
- the first tag sends RN16 to the reader based on subcarrier frequency f1 and carrier frequency f0
- the second tag sends RN16 to the reader based on subcarrier frequency f2 and carrier frequency f0.
- the reader sends a new ACK to the first tag and the second tag, and the new ACK is used to simultaneously confirm the RN16 of the first tag and the RN16 of the second tag.
- the first tag can send the EPC to the reader based on the subcarrier frequency f1 and the carrier frequency f0
- the second tag can send the EPC to the reader based on the subcarrier frequency f2 and the carrier frequency f0.
- the reader continues polling with other tags. For example, the reader sends a queryreq message by broadcast, the third tag sends RN16 to the reader based on the subcarrier frequency f3 and carrier frequency f0, and the reader sends new ACK to the third tag. Since there is only one label in the time unit of the queryreq message, the new ACK is used to confirm the RN16 sent by the third label.
- select may be located before the time unit of the query message, or may be located at the same time unit as the query message.
- the method provided by the embodiment of this application can make different tags choose different coding methods to upload RN16 and EPC as far as possible, so that multiple tags use different frequency resources (such as subcarrier frequencies).
- the reader can correctly decode concurrent RN16 (or EPC) through filtering and other methods, achieving the effect of concurrent access of multiple tags in the same time slot, improving the number of tag access per unit time and the overall tag access efficiency.
- FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c the description about the encoding method involved in FIG. 3 may refer to FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c.
- FIG. 3 for the description of the RFID-based communication method shown in FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c.
- FIG. 5 for the description of the RFID-based communication method shown in FIG. 3 .
- the description of each message shown in FIG. 5 may refer to FIG. 3 .
- FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c for the description of the encoding manner shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be listed here.
- the present application divides the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiments.
- each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module.
- the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in this application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
- the communication device according to the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 .
- FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6 , the communication device includes a processing unit 601 , a receiving unit 602 and a sending unit 603 .
- the communication device may be the tag shown above or a second communication device or the like. That is, the communication device can be used to execute the steps or functions executed by the tag in the method embodiments above.
- a receiving unit 602 configured to receive a first message
- a receiving unit 602 further configured to receive a second message
- a sending unit 603, configured to send the third message based on the first encoding manner.
- the processing unit 601 is configured to determine the third message according to the acquired first message and the second message, and send the third message based on the first encoding manner through the sending unit 603 .
- this embodiment of the present application makes no limitation.
- the receiving unit 602 may also be configured to perform the receiving steps shown in step 301 and step 302 shown in FIG. 3 .
- the sending unit 603 may also be configured to execute the sending step in step 303 shown in FIG. 3 .
- the receiving unit 602 may also be used to perform the receiving step in step 304 shown in FIG. 3
- the sending unit 603 may also be used to perform the sending step in step 305 shown in FIG. 3 .
- processing unit 601 may also be configured to execute the encoding manners shown in FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c. It can be understood that descriptions of the processing unit 601, the receiving unit 602, and the sending unit 603 are not listed here one by one.
- the above-mentioned communication device may be the reader or the first communication device shown above, or the like. That is, the communication device can be used to execute the steps or functions executed by the reader in the above method embodiments.
- a sending unit 603, configured to send the first message
- the receiving unit 602 is configured to receive the third message.
- the processing unit 601 may be configured to acquire the first message and acquire the second message.
- the processing unit 601 may also be configured to process the acquired third message, such as obtaining an ACK message.
- the sending unit 603 is further configured to send an ACK message; the receiving unit 602 is further configured to receive identification information.
- the sending unit 603 may also be configured to execute the sending steps shown in step 301 and step 302 shown in FIG. 3 .
- the receiving unit 602 may also be configured to perform the receiving step in step 303 shown in FIG. 3 .
- the sending unit 603 may also be configured to execute the sending step in step 304 shown in FIG. 3
- the receiving unit 602 may also be configured to execute the receiving step in step 305 shown in FIG. 3 . It can be understood that descriptions of the processing unit 601, the receiving unit 602, and the sending unit 603 are not listed here one by one.
- tags and readers of the embodiments of the present application are described above, and possible product forms of the tags and readers are introduced below. It should be understood that any form of product having the function of the tag described above in FIG. 6 , or any form of product having the function of the reader described above in FIG. 6 falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application. It should also be understood that the following introduction is only an example, and the product form of the tag and the reader in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
- the processing unit 601 may be one or more processors, the sending unit 603 may be a transmitter, and the receiving unit 602 may be a receiver, or the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver.
- the processing unit 601 may be one or more processors (or the processing unit 601 may be one or more logic circuits), the sending unit 603 may be an output interface, and the receiving unit 602 may be an input interface, or the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input and output interface. Details will be given below.
- the processing unit 601 may be one or more processors, and the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into a transceiver.
- the processor and the transceiver may be coupled, and the connection manner of the processor and the transceiver is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device 70 includes one or more processors 720 and a transceiver 710 .
- the transceiver 710 when the communication device is used to execute the steps or methods or functions performed by the above tag, the transceiver 710 is used to receive the first message and the second message; the transceiver 710 is also used to send the third message.
- the transceiver 710 may use the processor 720 to send the third message based on the first coding manner.
- the processor 720 may be a baseband processor; optionally, when the tag is an active device, the processor 720 may include a baseband processor and a radio frequency processor.
- the processor 720 shown here is only an example, and should not be construed as limiting the embodiment of the present application.
- the transceiver 710 when the communication device is used to execute the steps or methods or functions performed by the above reader, the transceiver 710 is used to send the first message and the second message; the transceiver 710 is also used to receive the third message.
- the processor 720 may be configured to acquire the first message, the second message, and so on.
- the transceiver may include a receiver and a transmitter, the receiver is used to perform a function (or operation) of reception, and the transmitter is used to perform a function (or operation) of transmission. And the transceiver is used to communicate with other devices/devices through the transmission medium.
- the communication device 70 may further include one or more memories 730 for storing program instructions and/or data.
- the memory 730 is coupled to the processor 720 .
- the coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules.
- Processor 720 may cooperate with memory 730 .
- Processor 720 may execute program instructions stored in memory 730 .
- a specific connection medium among the transceiver 710, the processor 720, and the memory 730 is not limited.
- the memory 730, the processor 720, and the transceiver 710 are connected through a bus 740.
- the bus is represented by a thick line in FIG.
- the bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 7 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
- the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, etc., and may realize or execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application.
- a general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
- the memory may include but not limited to hard disk drive (hard disk drive, HDD) or non-volatile memory such as solid-state drive (solid-state drive, SSD), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable Programmable ROM, EPROM), read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM) or portable read-only memory (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM) and so on.
- the memory is any storage medium that can be used to carry or store program codes in the form of instructions or data structures, and can be read and/or written by a computer (such as the communication device shown in this application, etc.), but is not limited thereto.
- the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, and is used for storing program instructions and/or data.
- the processor 720 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs.
- the memory 730 is mainly used to store software programs and data.
- the transceiver 710 may include a control circuit and an antenna, and the control circuit is mainly used for converting a baseband signal to a radio frequency signal and processing the radio frequency signal.
- Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
- the processor 720 can read the software program in the memory 730, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
- the processor 720 performs baseband processing on the data to be transmitted, and then outputs the baseband signal to a radio frequency circuit, and the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal, and then transmits the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
- the radio frequency circuit When data is sent to the communication device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 720, and the processor 720 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
- the input radio frequency signal may be processed by the baseband processor, or the signal processed by the baseband processor may be output by radio frequency.
- the radio frequency circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the processor performing baseband processing.
- the radio frequency circuit and antenna may be arranged remotely from the communication device.
- the working mode of the tag or the reader in the embodiment of the present application is only an example, which should not be interpreted as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
- the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application may have more components than those shown in FIG. 7 , which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- the method performed by the processor and the transceiver shown above is only an example, and for the specific steps performed by the processor and the transceiver, reference may be made to the method introduced above.
- the processing unit 601 may be one or more logic circuits, the sending unit 603 may be an output interface, and the receiving unit 602 may be an input interface.
- the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input and output interface.
- the input-output interface is also called a communication interface, or an interface circuit, or an interface, or the like.
- the communication device shown in FIG. 8 includes a logic circuit 801 and an interface 802 . That is, the above-mentioned processing unit 601 can be realized by a logic circuit 801 , and the receiving unit 602 and the sending unit 603 can be realized by an interface 802 .
- the logic circuit 801 may be a chip, a processing circuit, an integrated circuit or a system on chip (SoC) chip, etc.
- the interface 802 may be a communication interface, an input/output interface, or a pin.
- FIG. 8 takes the communication device as an example as a chip, and the chip includes a logic circuit 801 and an interface 802 .
- the logic circuit and the interface may also be coupled to each other.
- the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection manner of the logic circuit and the interface.
- the interface 802 is used to input the first message and the second message; the interface 802 is also used to output the third message.
- the interface 802 is also used to input an ACK message and output identification information.
- the logic circuit 801 is configured to obtain the third message according to the input first message and the second message.
- the logic circuit 801 is further configured to acquire identification information according to the input ACK message.
- the logic circuit 801 is used to obtain configuration information
- the interface 802 is used to output the first message and the second message
- the interface 802 is also used to input the third message.
- logic circuit 801 may be used to obtain the first message and the second message.
- the interface 802 is also configured to output an ACK message and input tag identification information.
- logic circuit 801 may be used to obtain the ACK message.
- the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application may implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of hardware, or may implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of software, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
- An embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system, the wireless communication system includes a tag and a reader, and the tag and the reader can be used to execute the method in any of the foregoing embodiments.
- the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the tag in the method provided in the present application.
- the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the reader in the method provided in the present application.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer codes, and when the computer codes run on the computer, the computer executes the operations and/or processing performed by the tag in the method provided by the present application.
- the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which computer code is stored, and when the computer code is run on the computer, the computer is made to perform the operations and/or processing performed by the reader in the method provided by the present application.
- the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer code or computer program, and when the computer code or computer program is run on the computer, the operation and/or processing performed by the tag in the method provided in the present application is executed.
- the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer code or computer program, and when the computer code or computer program is run on the computer, the operations and/or processing performed by the reader in the method provided in the present application are executed.
- the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
- the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
- the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
- multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not implemented.
- the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may also be electrical, mechanical or other forms of connection.
- the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to realize the technical effects of the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
- each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
- the above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
- the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
- the technical solution of the present application is essentially or part of the contribution to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product
- the computer software product is stored in a readable storage medium, and includes several instructions to make a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the application.
- the above-mentioned readable storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Electromagnetism (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Artificial Intelligence (AREA)
- Computer Vision & Pattern Recognition (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
Abstract
Disclosed in the present application are a communication method and apparatus based on wireless radio-frequency identification. The method comprises: a reader sending a first message, wherein the first message is used for identifying a label, the first message comprises indication information, the indication information is used for instructing the label to randomly determine an encoding mode, or determining an encoding mode on the basis of a sequence which is acquired by the label, or determining an encoding mode on the basis of a received signal energy intensity which is acquired by the label; the label receiving the first message; the reader sending a second message, wherein the second message is used for instructing the label to report the sequence; the label receiving the second message; then, the label sending a third message to the reader on the basis of a first encoding mode, wherein the third message comprises a first sequence; and the reader receiving the third message. By means of the method provided in the present application, the access efficiency of a label can be improved.
Description
本申请要求于2022年01月19日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210061629.1、申请名称为“基于无线射频识别的通信方法及装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202210061629.1 and the application title "Communication Method and Device Based on Radio Frequency Identification" submitted to the China Patent Office on January 19, 2022, the entire contents of which are incorporated in this application by reference.
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种基于无线射频识别的通信方法及装置。The present application relates to the technical field of communication, and in particular to a communication method and device based on radio frequency identification.
无线射频识别(radio frequency identification,RFID)技术产生于20世纪40年代。作为背反射通信的一种典型应用,RFID依靠发送端(如阅读器)发出特定频率的无线电波,携带能量和消息,接收端(如标签)在收集该特定频率的无线电波的能量后,进行整流和能量存储,并激活自身的处理能力。接收端通过调节自身的天线匹配网络,实现吸收或反射发送端发射的无线电波。从而发送端能够观察到接收端对其发射的无线电波的“扰动”,这种“扰动”便携带了特定的信息(如接收端的标识信息),发送端根据该特定的信息识别接收端。Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) technology was born in the 1940s. As a typical application of back reflection communication, RFID relies on the sending end (such as a reader) to send out radio waves of a specific frequency, carrying energy and messages. After the receiving end (such as a tag) collects the energy of the radio wave of this specific frequency, it performs rectification and energy storage, and activates its own processing capabilities. The receiving end adjusts its own antenna matching network to absorb or reflect the radio waves emitted by the sending end. Thus, the sending end can observe the "disturbance" of the radio wave emitted by the receiving end. This "disturbance" carries specific information (such as the identification information of the receiving end), and the sending end identifies the receiving end based on the specific information.
将无线射频识别技术应用于物联网(internet of things,IoT)时,可以有效解决物联网中的低功耗需求。尤其是针对海量物联网来说,阅读器可以有效地管理和识别其周边的海量标签,从而实现标签的自动识别和信息共享等。相应的,被管理的物品或设备等通过使用低功耗的标签,可以有效改善更换电池或插电的问题。示例性的,阅读器通过发出特定频率的无线电波,标签可以根据该特定频率的无线电波激活其自身的处理能力,从而向阅读器发送标签的相关信息。When radio frequency identification technology is applied to the Internet of Things (IoT), it can effectively solve the low power consumption requirement in the Internet of Things. Especially for the massive Internet of Things, the reader can effectively manage and identify the massive tags around it, so as to realize the automatic identification of tags and information sharing. Correspondingly, by using low-power tags for managed items or equipment, the problem of battery replacement or plugging in can be effectively improved. Exemplarily, the reader sends out radio waves of a specific frequency, and the tag can activate its own processing capability according to the radio wave of the specific frequency, so as to send relevant information of the tag to the reader.
然而,上述方法中,标签的接入效率还有待提高。However, in the above method, the tag access efficiency still needs to be improved.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种基于RFID的通信方法及装置,可以提高标签的接入效率。The present application provides an RFID-based communication method and device, which can improve tag access efficiency.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种基于RFID的通信方法,所述方法包括:In the first aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides an RFID-based communication method, the method comprising:
标签接收第一消息,所述第一消息用于识别所述标签,所述第一消息包括指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述标签随机确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式;所述标签接收第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述标签上报序列;所述标签基于第一编码方式向阅读器发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括第一序列。The tag receives a first message, the first message is used to identify the tag, and the first message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine an encoding mode, or determine an encoding mode based on a sequence obtained by the tag, or determine an encoding mode based on received signal energy strength obtained by the tag; the tag receives a second message, and the second message is used to indicate the tag to report a sequence; the tag sends a third message to the reader based on the first encoding mode, and the third message includes the first sequence.
本申请实施例中,通过指示信息确定编码方式,使得位于同一个时间单元内的标签尽可能地采用不同的编码方式,从而阅读器可以有效地恢复出来自不同标签的消息,有效改善了由于碰撞而丢弃信息的情况,提高了时域资源的利用率。In the embodiment of the present application, the encoding method is determined by indicating information, so that the tags located in the same time unit adopt different encoding methods as much as possible, so that the reader can effectively recover messages from different tags, effectively improve the situation of discarding information due to collisions, and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述标签接收来自所述阅读器的确认(acknowledge,ACK)消息,所述ACK消息用于确认一个或多个所述第一序列;所述标签基于所述第一编码方式向所述阅读器发送所述标签的标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the tag receives an acknowledgment (acknowledge, ACK) message from the reader, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences; the tag sends identification information of the tag to the reader based on the first encoding manner.
本申请实施例中,标签发送第三消息所采用的编码方式与发送标识信息时采用的编码方式相同,从而,标签通过指示信息确定第一编码方式,便可以通过该第一编码方式发送第三 消息和标识信息。In this embodiment of the application, the encoding method used by the tag to send the third message is the same as the encoding method used when sending the identification information. Therefore, the tag determines the first encoding method through the indication information, and can send the third message and identification information through the first encoding method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述标签获取到的序列包括以下至少一项:所述第一序列、第二序列或参考序列。In a possible implementation manner, the sequence obtained by the tag includes at least one of the following: the first sequence, the second sequence or a reference sequence.
本申请实施例中,标签可以基于其本身所能获取到的序列确定编码方式,从而尽可能地使得各个标签能够基于各自所获取到的序列确定编码方式。进而,尽可能使得选择同一个时间单元的标签采用不同的编码方式发送第三消息或标识信息,进一步提高时域资源的利用率。In the embodiment of the present application, the tag can determine the coding method based on the sequence that it can obtain, so that each tag can determine the coding method based on the sequence that it can obtain as much as possible. Furthermore, tags that select the same time unit use different encoding methods to send the third message or identification information as much as possible, so as to further improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式包括:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定编码方式,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数;或者,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定编码方式,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;或者,所述指示信息用于指示基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定编码方式,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;或者,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定编码方式,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the sequence obtained by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the x and the y are positive integers; The length of the second sequence, the i and the j are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the p-th bit and the q-th bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the x-th bit and the y-th bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, and the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, Said x and said y are positive integers.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式包括:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength acquired by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy intensity of the second message and a preset threshold.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一编码方式基于如下任一项确定:In a possible implementation manner, the first encoding manner is determined based on any of the following:
所述第一编码方式基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定;所述第一编码方式由所述标签随机确定。The first encoding method is determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, the m and the n are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the i bit and the j bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers; the first encoding method is based on the p bit and the q bit in the reference sequence It is determined that the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, the p and the q are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and the x and the y are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the comparison result of the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold;
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定包括:在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, determining the first coding method based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold includes: when the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method of M=8; or, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is smaller than the first threshold and greater than or equal to a second threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method of M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; In the case where the received signal energy strength is less than the second threshold and greater than or equal to the third threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is smaller than the third threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。In a possible implementation manner, the first message further includes at least one of start position information, length information, or a second sequence, the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence, and a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息和第二序列,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。In a possible implementation manner, the first message further includes start position information, length information, and a second sequence, the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence, and a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一编码方式包括以下任一项:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, the first encoding manner includes any of the following: M=1 Miller encoding manner, M=2 Miller encoding manner, M=4 Miller encoding manner, M=8 Miller encoding manner.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种基于无线射频识别RFID的通信方法,所述方法包括:In a second aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method based on radio frequency identification RFID, the method comprising:
阅读器发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于识别标签,所述第一消息包括指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述标签随机确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式;所述阅读器发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述标签上报序列;所述阅读器接收来自所述标签的第三消息,所述第三消息包括第一序列,所述第三消息的编码方式包括第一编码方式。The reader sends a first message, the first message is used to identify the tag, and the first message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine the encoding mode, or determine the encoding mode based on the sequence obtained by the tag, or determine the encoding mode based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the tag; the reader sends a second message, and the second message is used to indicate the sequence reported by the tag; the reader receives a third message from the tag, the third message includes the first sequence, and the encoding mode of the third message includes the first encoding mode.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述阅读器接收来自所述标签的第三消息包括:所述阅读器接收至少两个所述标签发送的第三消息,至少两个所述标签发送第三消息时采用的编码方式不同。In a possible implementation manner, the receiving the third message from the tag by the reader includes: receiving the third message sent by at least two tags by the reader, and at least two of the tags use different encoding methods when sending the third message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述阅读器发送确认ACK消息,所述ACK消息用于确认一个或多个所述第一序列;所述阅读器接收所述标签的标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the reader sends an acknowledgment ACK message, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences; and the reader receives the identification information of the tag.
可选的,阅读器可以向一个标签发送ACK消息,该ACK消息包括一个第一序列。可选的,阅读器可以向至少两个标签分别发送ACK消息,该ACK消息用于确认多个第一序列。当阅读器分别向至少两个标签发送ACK消息的情况下,该阅读器可以分别接收到该至少两个标签发送的标识信息。Optionally, the reader may send an ACK message to a tag, and the ACK message includes a first sequence. Optionally, the reader may send ACK messages to at least two tags respectively, where the ACK messages are used to confirm multiple first sequences. When the reader sends ACK messages to at least two tags, the reader can respectively receive the identification information sent by the at least two tags.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述标签获取到的序列包括以下至少一项:所述第一序列、第二序列或参考序列。In a possible implementation manner, the sequence obtained by the tag includes at least one of the following: the first sequence, the second sequence or a reference sequence.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式包括:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定编码方式,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;或者,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定编码方式,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;或者,所述指示信息用于指示基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定编码方式,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;或者,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定编码方式,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数。In a possible implementation manner, the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the sequence obtained by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the m and the n are positive integers; The length of the second sequence, the i and the j are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the p-th bit and the q-th bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers; or, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the x-th bit and the y-th bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, and the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, Said x and said y are positive integers.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式包括:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, the indication information used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength acquired by the tag includes: the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy intensity of the second message and a preset threshold.
在一种可能的实现方式中,基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式包括:在在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=2的米 勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, determining the encoding method based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold includes: when the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the encoding method determined by the tag includes a Miller encoding method of M=8; or, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is smaller than the first threshold and greater than or equal to a second threshold, the encoding method determined by the tag includes a Miller encoding method of M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; When the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the second threshold and greater than or equal to the third threshold, the encoding method determined by the tag includes a Miller encoding method with M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the third threshold, the encoding method determined by the tag includes a Miller encoding method with M=1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一编码方式基于如下任一项确定:In a possible implementation manner, the first encoding manner is determined based on any of the following:
所述第一编码方式基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数;所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定;所述第一编码方式由所述标签随机确定。The first encoding method is determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, the m and the n are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the i bit and the j bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers; the first encoding method is based on the p bit and the q bit in the reference sequence It is determined that the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, the p and the q are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and the x and the y are positive integers; the first encoding method is determined based on the comparison result of the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold;
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定包括:在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, determining the first coding method based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold includes: when the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method of M=8; or, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is smaller than the first threshold and greater than or equal to a second threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method of M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; In the case where the received signal energy strength is less than the second threshold and greater than or equal to the third threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is smaller than the third threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=1.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。In a possible implementation manner, the first message further includes at least one of start position information, length information, or a second sequence, the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence, and a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息和第二序列,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。In a possible implementation manner, the first message further includes start position information, length information, and a second sequence, the start position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used to compare with the second sequence, and a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述标签确定的编码方式包括以下任一项:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。In a possible implementation manner, the encoding manner determined by the tag includes any of the following: M=1 Miller encoding manner, M=2 Miller encoding manner, M=4 Miller encoding manner, M=8 Miller encoding manner.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种第二通信装置,用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该第二通信装置包括具有执行第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication device, configured to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. The second communication device includes a unit for performing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
本申请实施例中,第二通信装置可以包括标签。In this embodiment of the present application, the second communication device may include a tag.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种第一通信装置,用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。该第一通信装置包括具有执行第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法的单元。In a fourth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, configured to execute the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. The first communication device includes a unit for performing the method in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
本申请实施例中,第一通信装置可以包括阅读器或设置于阅读器中的芯片或芯片系统等。In the embodiment of the present application, the first communication device may include a reader or a chip or a chip system disposed in the reader.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供一种第二通信装置,该第二通信装置包括处理器,用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法。或者,该处理器用于执行存储器中存储的程序,当该程序被执行时,上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a fifth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication device, where the second communication device includes a processor, configured to execute the method described in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect. Alternatively, the processor is used to execute a program stored in the memory, and when the program is executed, the method shown in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect is executed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,存储器位于上述第二通信装置之外。In a possible implementation manner, the memory is located outside the second communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,存储器位于上述第二通信装置之内。In a possible implementation manner, the memory is located in the second communication device.
本申请实施例中,处理器和存储器还可以集成于一个器件中,即处理器和存储器还可以被集成在一起。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor and the memory may also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory may also be integrated together.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第二通信装置还包括收发器,该收发器,用于接收信号或发送信号。In a possible implementation manner, the second communication device further includes a transceiver, where the transceiver is configured to receive a signal or send a signal.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种第一通信装置,该第一通信装置包括处理器,用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法。或者,处理器用于执行存储器中存储的程序,当该程序被执行时,上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a sixth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, where the first communication device includes a processor, configured to execute the method described in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect. Alternatively, the processor is used to execute the program stored in the memory, and when the program is executed, the method shown in the above second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect is executed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,存储器位于上述第一通信装置之外。In a possible implementation manner, the memory is located outside the first communication device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,存储器位于上述第一通信装置之内。In a possible implementation manner, the memory is located in the first communication device.
在本申请实施例中,处理器和存储器还可以集成于一个器件中,即处理器和存储器还可以被集成在一起。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor and the memory may also be integrated into one device, that is, the processor and the memory may also be integrated together.
在一种可能的实现方式中,第一通信装置还包括收发器,该收发器,用于接收信号或发送信号。In a possible implementation manner, the first communication device further includes a transceiver, where the transceiver is configured to receive a signal or send a signal.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供一种第二通信装置,该第二通信装置包括逻辑电路和接口,所述逻辑电路和所述接口耦合;所述接口,用于输入第一消息和第二消息;所述接口,还用于输出所述第三消息。In a seventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication device, the second communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, the logic circuit is coupled to the interface; the interface is used to input the first message and the second message; the interface is also used to output the third message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述接口,还用于输入ACK消息,以及输出所述第二通信装置的标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the interface is further configured to input an ACK message and output identification information of the second communication device.
可理解,逻辑电路,用于根据输入的第一消息和第二消息获取第三消息。可选的,逻辑电路,还用于根据输入的ACK消息获取标识信息。It can be understood that the logic circuit is configured to obtain the third message according to the input first message and the second message. Optionally, the logic circuit is further configured to acquire identification information according to the input ACK message.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供一种第一通信装置,该第一通信装置包括逻辑电路和接口,所述逻辑电路和所述接口耦合;所述接口,用于输出第一消息和第二消息,所述接口,还用于输入第三消息。In an eighth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication device, the first communication device includes a logic circuit and an interface, the logic circuit is coupled to the interface; the interface is used to output a first message and a second message, and the interface is also used to input a third message.
可理解,逻辑电路,可以用于获取第一消息和第二消息。It can be understood that the logic circuit can be used to acquire the first message and the second message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述接口,还用于输出ACK消息,以及输入标签的标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the interface is further configured to output an ACK message and input tag identification information.
可理解,逻辑电路,可以用于获取ACK消息。It can be understood that the logic circuit can be used to obtain the ACK message.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In the ninth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store a computer program, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect is executed.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a tenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is used to store a computer program, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above-mentioned second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect is executed.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In the eleventh aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or computer code, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect is executed.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或计算机代码,当其在计算机上运行时,使得上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or computer code, and when it is run on a computer, the method shown in the above second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect is executed.
第十三方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序,该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program. When the computer program is run on a computer, the method shown in the above-mentioned first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect is executed.
第十四方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序,该计算机程序在计算机上运行时,上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法被执行。In a fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program. When the computer program is run on a computer, the method shown in the second aspect or any possible implementation manner of the second aspect is executed.
第十五方面,本申请实施例提供一种无线通信系统,该无线通信系统包括标签和阅读器,所述标签用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法,所述阅读器用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意可能的实现方式所示的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a wireless communication system, the wireless communication system includes a tag and a reader, the tag is used to execute the method shown in the first aspect or any possible implementation of the first aspect, and the reader is used to execute the method shown in the second aspect or any possible implementation of the second aspect.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种无线射频识别系统的架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a radio frequency identification system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2a是本申请实施例提供的一种基于RFID的通信方法的交互示意图;Fig. 2a is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2b是本申请实施例提供的另一种基于RFID的通信方法的交互示意图;Fig. 2b is an interactive schematic diagram of another RFID-based communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种基于RFID的通信方法的交互示意图;FIG. 3 is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4a和图4b是本申请实施例提供的一种编码方式的示意图;Figure 4a and Figure 4b are schematic diagrams of a coding method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图4c是本申请实施例提供的一种编码方式与载波频率之间的示意图;Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram between a coding method and a carrier frequency provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请实施例提供的另一种基于RFID的通信方法的交互示意图;FIG. 5 is an interactive schematic diagram of another RFID-based communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application;
图6至图8是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图。6 to 8 are schematic structural diagrams of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
为了使本申请的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚,下面将结合附图对本申请作进一步地描述。In order to make the purpose, technical solution and advantages of the application clearer, the application will be further described below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
本申请的说明书、权利要求书及附图中的术语“第一”和“第二”等仅用于区别不同对象,而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备等,没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元等,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备等固有的其它步骤或单元。The terms "first" and "second" in the specification, claims and drawings of the present application are only used to distinguish different objects, not to describe a specific order. Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having", as well as any variations thereof, are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product, or device that includes a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes steps or units that are not listed, or optionally also includes other inherent steps or units for these processes, methods, products, or devices.
在本文中提及的“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员可以显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。Reference herein to "an embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment may be included in at least one embodiment of the present application. The occurrences of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are separate or alternative embodiments mutually exclusive of other embodiments. It is understood explicitly and implicitly by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein can be combined with other embodiments.
在本申请中,“至少一个(项)”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上,“至少两个(项)”是指两个或三个及三个以上,“和/或”,用于描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,“A和/或B”可以表示:只存在A,只存在B以及同时存在A和B三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指这些项中的任意组合。例如,a,b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,“a和b”,“a和c”,“b和c”,或“a和b和c”。In the present application, "at least one (item)" refers to one or more, "multiple" refers to two or more, "at least two (items)" refers to two or three and more than three, "and/or" is used to describe the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three kinds of relationships. The character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items. For example, at least one item (unit) of a, b or c may represent: a, b, c, "a and b", "a and c", "b and c", or "a and b and c".
一般来说,收发两端都是有源(如插电或者电池)设备。然而,对于背反射通信来说,一般是指收发两端中的一端是无源的,另一端是有源的。例如,发送端是有源的,接收端是无源的。例如,发送端可以用于发射无线电波激活接收端,使得该接收端能够发送信号。又例如,发送端通过发射射频载波传输射频能量,从而激活接收端。激活后的接收端可以继续 接收发送端发送的下行消息,并作出上行回应(如向发送端发送自身的标识信息)。又例如,接收端被激活后,发送端仍然继续发射射频载波,接收端通过调整其天线阻抗,产生与射频载波匹配或者不匹配的状态。从而导致发送端发射的射频载波可能会分别被不同的接收端吸收或者反射,由此,发送端可以获得回波信号中出现的因为接收端吸收或者反射而造成的回波信号大小波动,此种变化便可携带上行消息(如包括RN16的上行消息或包括EPC的上行消息等)。通过上述方式,发送端和接收端便可以完成一轮上下行交互过程。上述所示的通信方式便可以称为背反射通信。Generally speaking, both ends of the transceiver are active (such as plug-in or battery) devices. However, for back reflection communication, it generally means that one of the two ends of the transceiver is passive and the other is active. For example, the sending end is active and the receiving end is passive. For example, a transmitter can be used to transmit radio waves to activate a receiver so that the receiver can transmit a signal. For another example, the transmitting end transmits radio frequency energy by transmitting a radio frequency carrier, thereby activating the receiving end. The activated receiving end can continue to receive the downlink message sent by the sending end, and make an uplink response (such as sending its own identification information to the sending end). For another example, after the receiving end is activated, the sending end still continues to transmit the radio frequency carrier, and the receiving end adjusts its antenna impedance to produce a state of matching or not matching with the radio frequency carrier. As a result, the radio frequency carriers transmitted by the sending end may be absorbed or reflected by different receiving ends, so that the sending end can obtain the fluctuation in the size of the echo signal caused by the absorption or reflection of the receiving end in the echo signal, and this change can carry uplink messages (such as uplink messages including RN16 or uplink messages including EPC, etc.). Through the above method, the sending end and the receiving end can complete a round of uplink and downlink interaction process. The communication method shown above can be called back reflection communication.
本申请实施例中,发送端可以包括阅读器(也可以称为RFID阅读器),接收端包括标签(也可以称为RFID标签)。可理解,以上所示的背反射通信同样适用于无线射频识别技术,这里不再对无线射频识别技术一一详述。In the embodiment of the present application, the sending end may include a reader (also called an RFID reader), and the receiving end includes a tag (also called an RFID tag). It can be understood that the back reflection communication shown above is also applicable to the radio frequency identification technology, and the radio frequency identification technology will not be described in detail here.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种无线射频识别系统的架构示意图。如图1所示,该无线射频识别系统包括阅读器(reader)101和标签(tag)102,该阅读器101可以是有源设备,标签102可以是无源设备、半有源设备或有源设备。示例性的,无源的标签可以理解为该标签不包括射频处理器,通过背反射通信发送上行消息。半有源的标签可以理解为该标签不包括射频处理器,但是包括电源或插电等,通过背反射通信发送上行消息。有源的标签可以理解为该标签包括射频处理器、包括电源或插电等,通过背反射通信发送上行消息。有源的标签相对于半有源的标签,发射信号的功率可以被增强。或者,有源的标签相对于无源的标签,发射信号的功率可以被增强。本申请实施例中,将阅读器向标签发送信号的方向称为下行,将标签向阅读器发送信号的方向称为上行。Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a radio frequency identification system provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1 , the RFID system includes a reader 101 and a tag 102. The reader 101 may be an active device, and the tag 102 may be a passive device, a semi-active device or an active device. Exemplarily, a passive tag can be understood as the tag does not include a radio frequency processor, and sends an uplink message through back reflection communication. A semi-active tag can be understood as the tag does not include a radio frequency processor, but includes a power supply or plug-in, etc., and sends uplink messages through back reflection communication. An active tag can be understood as the tag includes a radio frequency processor, including a power supply or plug-in, etc., and sends uplink messages through back reflection communication. Compared with semi-active tags, active tags can increase the power of the transmitted signal. Alternatively, the power of the transmitted signal of an active tag may be boosted relative to a passive tag. In the embodiment of the present application, the direction in which the reader sends signals to the tags is called downlink, and the direction in which the tags send signals to the readers is called uplink.
图1仅示例性示出了三个标签,但是不应将其理解为对本申请实施例的限定。示例性的,标签102可以包括芯片、公交卡、银行卡、打印标签或工卡等,本申请实施例对于该标签的具体产品形态不作限定。可理解,本申请实施例所示的标签还可以直接嵌入到纸中,从而将纸贴在物品上,以便于实现阅读器对该物品的识别或管理等。Fig. 1 only exemplarily shows three labels, but it should not be understood as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the label 102 may include a chip, a bus card, a bank card, a printed label, or a work card, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific product form of the label. It can be understood that the label shown in the embodiment of the present application can also be directly embedded in the paper, so that the paper can be pasted on the item, so as to facilitate identification or management of the item by the reader.
如图1所示,阅读器101通过发射射频信号激活标签102,该标签102被激活后,根据其接收到的下行消息向阅读器101发送上行消息。可理解,关于下行消息和上行消息的具体说明可以参考下文,这里先不详述。可理解,这里所示的射频信号也可以称为射频载波、载波、电磁波或无线电波等,本申请实施例对于该射频信号的具体名称不作限定。As shown in FIG. 1 , the reader 101 activates the tag 102 by transmitting a radio frequency signal. After the tag 102 is activated, it sends an uplink message to the reader 101 according to the downlink message it receives. It can be understood that for specific descriptions of downlink messages and uplink messages, reference may be made to the following, and details will not be described here. It can be understood that the radio frequency signal shown here may also be called a radio frequency carrier, carrier wave, electromagnetic wave, or radio wave, and the specific name of the radio frequency signal is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,阅读器101可以通过射频信号自动识别标签102,并获取相关信息。又例如,阅读器101可以用于管理和/或识别周边的标签102。又例如,阅读器101可以用于将其从标签102接收到的相关信息(如标签102的标识信息等)上报至中央服务器或数据库等(该中央服务器或数据库可以用于存储标签的相关信息或识别标签的位置等)。又例如,阅读器101可以根据其从标签102接收到的相关信息对标签102进行自动识别或信息共享。关于阅读器和标签的说明,这里不再一一列举。Exemplarily, the reader 101 can automatically identify the tag 102 through a radio frequency signal, and obtain relevant information. For another example, the reader 101 may be used to manage and/or identify surrounding tags 102 . For another example, the reader 101 can be used to report the relevant information it receives from the tag 102 (such as the identification information of the tag 102, etc.) to a central server or database (the central server or database can be used to store the relevant information of the tag or identify the location of the tag, etc.). For another example, the reader 101 may automatically identify or share information on the tag 102 according to the relevant information it receives from the tag 102 . Instructions on readers and tags are not listed here.
图1所示的无线射频识别系统可以应用于物联网、窄带物联网、车联网等,本申请实施例对于该无线射频识别系统的具体应用不作限定。例如,图1所示的无线射频识别系统可以应用于物流管理、生产制造、航空行李处理、快递包裹处理、文档追踪、图书馆管理、动物身份识别、运动计时、门禁控制(如电子门票的控制)、道路自动收费等,这里不再一一列举。The radio frequency identification system shown in FIG. 1 can be applied to the Internet of Things, the narrowband Internet of Things, the Internet of Vehicles, etc., and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific application of the radio frequency identification system. For example, the radio frequency identification system shown in Figure 1 can be applied to logistics management, manufacturing, airline luggage handling, express package handling, document tracking, library management, animal identification, sports timing, access control (such as electronic ticket control), automatic road toll collection, etc., and will not be listed here.
以下详细说明阅读器和标签之间的交互过程。The following describes the interaction process between the reader and the tag in detail.
阅读器可以向外界发射射频信号,并通过射频信号所包含的射频能量传输至标签,激活标签,从而使得标签与阅读器进行通信。图2a是本申请实施例提供的一种基于RFID的通信 方法的交互示意图。如图2a所示,阅读器向外发送用于激活标签的下行消息,该下行消息也可以称为下行消息帧等。该下行消息帧的帧头包括空白的载波,该空白的载波用于激活标签,标签被激活后,其内部的电路和芯片开始工作,如可以解码其接收到的下行消息帧。当标签完成下行接收后,阅读器仍然持续发送空白载波,用于维持标签的能量供给,并使标签可以将自身准备的上行消息调制到阅读器所持续发送的载波上,从而通过背向反射的方式发送出去。阅读器接收到来自标签的上行消息后,向标签发送确认消息,从而标签对该确认消息解码后,向阅读器发送该标签的标识信息。由此,阅读器便可以根据该标签的标识信息进行识别或管理等。The reader can transmit a radio frequency signal to the outside world, and transmit the radio frequency energy contained in the radio frequency signal to the tag to activate the tag, thereby enabling the tag to communicate with the reader. Fig. 2a is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Fig. 2a, the reader sends out a downlink message for activating the tag, and the downlink message may also be called a downlink message frame or the like. The frame header of the downlink message frame includes a blank carrier, which is used to activate the tag. After the tag is activated, its internal circuits and chips start to work, such as decoding the downlink message frame it receives. After the tag completes the downlink reception, the reader still continues to send blank carrier waves to maintain the energy supply of the tag, and enables the tag to modulate the uplink message prepared by itself onto the carrier wave continuously sent by the reader, so as to send it out through back reflection. After receiving the uplink message from the tag, the reader sends an acknowledgment message to the tag, so that after the tag decodes the acknowledgment message, it sends the tag's identification information to the reader. Thus, the reader can identify or manage the tag according to the identification information of the tag.
以无线射频识别系统中广泛采用的电子产品编码第二代超高频(electronic product code generation-2ultra high frequency,EPC-Gen2 UHF)协议为例,该协议定义了860MHz~920MHz的RFID链路和媒体接入层标准。该EPC-Gen2 UHF协议采用了动态的时间单元的方式使标签接入。即阅读器和标签之间存在轮询的通信过程。由于本申请实施例所示的时间单元可以包括时隙(slot),因此上述动态的时间单元也可以称为动态的帧时隙(dynamic framed slotted Aloha,DFSA)。Take the electronic product code generation-2 ultra high frequency (EPC-Gen2 UHF) protocol widely used in radio frequency identification systems as an example. This protocol defines the RFID link and media access layer standards of 860MHz to 920MHz. The EPC-Gen2 UHF protocol uses a dynamic time unit to enable tag access. That is, there is a polling communication process between the reader and the tag. Since the time unit shown in the embodiment of the present application may include a slot, the above dynamic time unit may also be called a dynamic framed slotted Aloha (DFSA).
图2b是本申请实施例提供的另一种基于RFID的通信方法的交互示意图。Fig. 2b is an interactive schematic diagram of another RFID-based communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
可选的,在阅读器发送询问消息之前,阅读器可以通过广播的形式发送选择(select)消息,该选择消息可以用于选择具有某些特征的标签,从而阅读器与该具有某些特征的标签进行通信。也就是说,该选择消息可以用于识别标签。如标签通过该选择消息可以获知其是否与阅读器进行交互。Optionally, before the reader sends the inquiry message, the reader may send a select message in the form of broadcast, and the select message may be used to select a tag with certain characteristics, so that the reader communicates with the tag with certain characteristics. That is, the selection message can be used to identify the tag. For example, the tag can know whether it interacts with the reader through the selection message.
示例性的,选择消息的内容可以如表1所示。Exemplarily, the content of the selection message may be as shown in Table 1.
表1Table 1
示例性的,指令字段用于指示该选择消息的帧类型,如该选择消息的帧类型可以为1010。目标(target)字段用于指示已盘标记(inventoried)。例如,目标字段的取值为000时,表示选中的已盘标记为S0。又例如,目标字段的取值为001时,表示选中的已盘标记为S1。又如,目标字段的取值为010时,表示选中的已盘标记为S2。又如,目标字段的取值为011时,表示选中的已盘标记为S3。又如,目标字段的取值为100时,表示选中的已盘标记为SL。又如,目标字段的取值为101、110或111中的任一项时,则表示选择消息中的目标字段的取值为保留以作为将来可用的比特((reserved for use,RFU)。当选择消息中目标字段的取值为101、110或111中的任一项时,则表示不再使用该选择消息。即标签可以忽略或抛弃该选择消息。Exemplarily, the instruction field is used to indicate the frame type of the selection message, for example, the frame type of the selection message may be 1010 . The target field is used to indicate inventoried. For example, when the value of the target field is 000, it means that the selected marked disk is S0. For another example, when the value of the target field is 001, it means that the selected marked disk is S1. For another example, when the value of the target field is 010, it means that the selected marked disk is S2. For another example, when the value of the target field is 011, it means that the selected marked disk is S3. For another example, when the value of the target field is 100, it means that the selected marked disk is SL. For another example, when the value of the target field is any one of 101, 110 or 111, it means that the value of the target field in the selection message is reserved as a bit (reserved for use, RFU) available in the future. When the value of the target field in the selection message is any one of 101, 110 or 111, it means that the selection message is no longer used. That is, the tag can ignore or discard the selection message.
示例性的,动作(action)字段用于表示匹配标签是否确认或取消确认SL标记,或者表示是否设置已盘标记。存储体(membank)字段用于指示掩模(mask)(也可以称为掩码)应 用于电子产品编码(electronic product code,EPC)、标签标识(tagidentification,TID)、文本类型或单一的文本。示例性的,存储体字段的取值为00时,可以表示标签后续寻找的内存内容为文本类型(file type)。又如,存储体字段的取值为01时,可以表示标签后续寻找的内存内容为EPC。又如,存储体字段的取值为10时,可以表示标签后续寻找的内存内容为TID。又如,存储体字段的取值为11时,可以表示标签后续寻找的内存内容为一种单一的文本(如file_0)。指针(pointer)字段用于指示标签所截取数据的起始位置。根据该指针字段和存储体字段可使得标签从指针字段所指示的起始位置开始从存储体字段所指示的内容中截取数据。长度(length)字段用于指示从指针字段所指示的起始位置开始截取的数据长度。根据存储体字段、指针字段和长度字段,则标签可以从存储体字段所指示的内存内容按照从指针字段指示的起始位置开始截取length长度的数据。示例性的,掩模(mask)字段用于指示阅读器所设置的mask序列,该mask序列用于与标签所截取的数据进行比较,由此,生成length长度的比较结果。当比较结果符合一定条件时,表示标签是阅读器所选择的标签。可理解,以上所示的一定条件可以由阅读器设置,本申请实施例对于该一定条件的具体内容不作限定。例如,存储体字段可以用于指示标签去寻找其内存内容,从而将其内存内容与掩模字段指示的序列进行比较,比较的方式是存储体字段指示的内存内容,从指针字段指示的位置开始,取长度字段所指示的长度,取出来后的序列与掩模字段指示的序列进行比较,比较结果符合一定条件时,表示标签被选择消息选中。Exemplarily, the action (action) field is used to indicate whether the matching tag confirms or cancels the SL flag, or indicates whether to set the disked flag. The membank field is used to indicate that a mask (may also be referred to as a mask) is applied to electronic product code (electronic product code, EPC), tag identification (tagidentification, TID), text type or a single text. Exemplarily, when the value of the storage body field is 00, it may indicate that the memory content that the tag subsequently searches for is a text type (file type). For another example, when the value of the storage body field is 01, it may indicate that the memory content to be searched by the tag subsequently is EPC. For another example, when the value of the storage body field is 10, it may indicate that the memory content to be searched by the tag subsequently is TID. As another example, when the value of the storage body field is 11, it may indicate that the memory content that the tag subsequently searches for is a single text (such as file_0). The pointer (pointer) field is used to indicate the starting position of the data intercepted by the tag. According to the pointer field and the storage body field, the tag can start to intercept data from the content indicated by the storage body field from the starting position indicated by the pointer field. The length (length) field is used to indicate the length of data intercepted from the starting position indicated by the pointer field. According to the storage body field, the pointer field and the length field, the tag can intercept data of length length from the memory content indicated by the storage body field according to the starting position indicated by the pointer field. Exemplarily, the mask (mask) field is used to indicate the mask sequence set by the reader, and the mask sequence is used for comparison with the data intercepted by the tag, thereby generating a comparison result of length. When the comparison result meets a certain condition, it means that the tag is the tag selected by the reader. It can be understood that the certain condition shown above may be set by the reader, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific content of the certain condition. For example, the memory field can be used to instruct the tag to find its memory content, so as to compare its memory content with the sequence indicated by the mask field. The comparison method is to start from the position indicated by the pointer field, take the length indicated by the length field, and compare the extracted sequence with the sequence indicated by the mask field. When the comparison result meets certain conditions, it means that the tag is selected by the selection message.
示例性的,截断(truncate)字段用于指示标签返回的EPC是否为截断后的EPC。循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check,CRC)可以用于验证该选择消息。例如,选择消息中的CRC的比特长度可以为16个比特。Exemplarily, the truncate (truncate) field is used to indicate whether the EPC returned by the tag is a truncated EPC. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) may be used to verify the selection message. For example, the bit length of the CRC in the selection message may be 16 bits.
可理解,当阅读器不发送选择消息时,接收到询问消息的标签都可以与阅读器进行交互。It can be understood that, when the reader does not send the selection message, all tags that receive the query message can interact with the reader.
示例性的,在一个轮询过程的开始时刻,由阅读器设置随机参数,如该随机参数可以用Q表示,该Q可以用于指示轮询过程中所包括的时间单元的数量,如包括2
Q-1个时间单元。该Q还可以用于表示阅读器与标签之间的轮询次数,如包括2
Q-1个轮询。可理解,本申请实施例所示的轮询指的是阅读器与标签之间通过轮询完成如图2a所示的交互过程,和/或,阅读器与标签之间通过轮询完成如图2b所示的一个时间单元内的交互过程。可理解,本申请实施例对于一个时间单元的时长不作限定。一个时间单元还可以称为一个时隙或一个时间单位等,本申请实施例对于该时间单元的具体名称不作限定。
Exemplarily, at the beginning of a polling process, a random parameter is set by the reader, such as the random parameter can be represented by Q, and the Q can be used to indicate the number of time units included in the polling process, such as including 2 Q -1 time units. The Q can also be used to indicate the number of polls between the reader and the tag, for example, 2 Q −1 polls are included. It can be understood that the polling shown in the embodiment of the present application refers to the completion of the interaction process between the reader and the tag as shown in Figure 2a through polling, and/or the completion of the interaction process within a time unit between the reader and the tag as shown in Figure 2b through polling. It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit the duration of one time unit. A time unit may also be called a time slot or a time unit, and the specific name of the time unit is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
如图2b所示,阅读器可以以广播的形式发送询问消息(图2b用query表示该询问消息),该询问消息中包括随机参数。示例性的,询问消息的内容可以如表2a所示。As shown in FIG. 2b, the reader may send a query message in the form of broadcast (the query message is represented by query in FIG. 2b), and the query message includes random parameters. Exemplarily, the content of the inquiry message may be as shown in Table 2a.
表2aTable 2a
其中,指令(command)字段用于指示该询问消息的帧类型,如询问消息的帧类型可以为1000。除法比例(division ratio,DR)用于指示标签与阅读器通信的连接频率。M用于指示标签发送上行消息时所采用的编码方式和信息速率。可理解,M还可以用于表示每个符号(如比特)中的循环次数。上述编码方式包括:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。可理解,M=1的米勒编码方式也可以称为双相空间编码(bi-phase space coding,FM0)方法。该M占用2个比特,如M的取值为00时, 表示标签可以采用FM0方法;又如,M的取值为01时,表示标签可以采用M=2的米勒编码方式;又如,M的取值为10时,表示标签可以采用M=4的米勒编码方式;又如,M的取值为11时,表示标签可以采用M=8的米勒编码方式。标签扩展字段用于指示标签的上行前导码是否包括导频。该TRext占用1个比特,如TRext的取值为0时,表示不使用导频;又如,TRext的取值为1时,表示使用导频。可理解,该标签扩展字段还可以称为TRext字段,或者tag reponse extend字段等,本申请实施例对于该标签扩展字段的英文名称不作限定。选择字段用于选择响应询问消息的标签集合,占用2个比特。通话(session)字段用于指示参与轮询过程标签的通话类型,占用2个比特。例如,通话字段的取值为00时,则表示通话类型为S0。又例如,通话字段的取值为01时,则表示通话类型为S1。又例如,通话字段的取值为10时,则表示通话类型为S2。又例如,通话字段的取值为11时,则表示通话类型为S3。目标(target)字段用于指示参与轮询过程的标签的已盘标记为A或B,占用1个比特。Q表示轮询的时间单元的个数,该Q占用4个比特,该4个比特可以用于指示0~15中的任一个。循环冗余校验(cyclic redundancy check,CRC)占用5个比特。Wherein, the command (command) field is used to indicate the frame type of the inquiry message, for example, the frame type of the inquiry message may be 1000. The division ratio (division ratio, DR) is used to indicate the connection frequency of the tag and reader communication. M is used to indicate the coding mode and information rate adopted by the tag when sending the uplink message. It can be understood that M can also be used to represent the number of cycles in each symbol (eg, bit). The above coding methods include: M=1 Miller coding method, M=2 Miller coding method, M=4 Miller coding method, M=8 Miller coding method. It can be understood that the Miller coding method with M=1 may also be called a bi-phase space coding (bi-phase space coding, FM0) method. The M occupies 2 bits. For example, when the value of M is 00, it means that the tag can use the FM0 method; for another example, when the value of M is 01, it means that the tag can use the Miller coding method of M=2; for another example, when the value of M is 10, it means that the tag can use the Miller coding method of M=4; The label extension field is used to indicate whether the uplink preamble of the label includes pilot frequency. The TRext occupies 1 bit. For example, when the value of TRext is 0, it means that the pilot is not used; for another example, when the value of TRext is 1, it means that the pilot is used. It can be understood that the tag extension field may also be called a TRext field, or a tag response extend field, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the English name of the tag extension field. The selection field is used to select the tag set that responds to the inquiry message, and occupies 2 bits. The session field is used to indicate the session type participating in the polling process tag, occupying 2 bits. For example, when the value of the call field is 00, it indicates that the call type is S0. For another example, when the value of the call field is 01, it indicates that the call type is S1. For another example, when the value of the call field is 10, it indicates that the call type is S2. For another example, when the value of the call field is 11, it indicates that the call type is S3. The target (target) field is used to indicate that the disked flag of the tag participating in the polling process is A or B, and occupies 1 bit. Q represents the number of polling time units, and the Q occupies 4 bits, and the 4 bits can be used to indicate any one of 0-15. A cyclic redundancy check (CRC) occupies 5 bits.
当标签获取到阅读器广播的询问消息时,标签可以根据Q的取值确定时间单元的总数量,随机产生一个序列,以及随机在2
Q-1个时间单元中选择一个时间单元。示例性的,标签可以随机产生一个比特长度为16的序列,如该序列可以包括16位随机数(random number 16,RN16)(如图2b所示的RN16,或者如表3所示的RN16)。可理解,以上所示的RN16还可以称为伪随机数。可理解,当多个标签都收到询问消息时,该多个标签中的每个标签都可以随机产生一个序列,以及随机在2
Q-1个时间单元中选择一个时间单元。可理解,图2b仅示例性示出了两个标签,如第一标签和第二标签,不应将图2b所示的标签的数量理解为对本申请实施例的限定。
When the tag obtains the query message broadcast by the reader, the tag can determine the total number of time units according to the value of Q, randomly generate a sequence, and randomly select a time unit among 2 Q -1 time units. Exemplarily, the tag can randomly generate a sequence with a bit length of 16, for example, the sequence can include a 16-bit random number (random number 16, RN16) (RN16 as shown in Figure 2b, or RN16 as shown in Table 3). It can be understood that the RN16 shown above may also be called a pseudo-random number. It can be understood that, when multiple tags receive the query message, each of the multiple tags can randomly generate a sequence, and randomly select a time unit among 2 Q −1 time units. It can be understood that Fig. 2b only exemplarily shows two tags, such as a first tag and a second tag, and the number of tags shown in Fig. 2b should not be construed as limiting the embodiment of the present application.
在每个时间单元中,阅读器都可以以广播的形式发送询问消息(如图2b所示的query或queryreq),由此,在标签所选择的时间单元与询问消息所在的时间单元一致时,标签可以在接收到询问消息后向阅读器发送包括RN16的上行消息。可理解,为区分表2a和表2b所示的询问消息,表2b所示的询问消息还可以称为询问重复消息,或查询重复消息等,本申请实施例对于表2b所示的消息的具体名称不作限定。In each time unit, the reader can send a query message in the form of broadcast (query or queryreq as shown in Figure 2b), thus, when the time unit selected by the tag is consistent with the time unit where the query message is located, the tag can send an uplink message including RN16 to the reader after receiving the query message. It can be understood that, in order to distinguish the query messages shown in Table 2a and Table 2b, the query messages shown in Table 2b can also be called query repeat messages, or query repeat messages, etc. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific names of the messages shown in Table 2b.
示例性的,询问重复(queryreq)消息的内容可以如表2b所示。Exemplarily, the content of the query repeat (queryreq) message may be as shown in Table 2b.
表2bTable 2b
其中,指令字段用于指示询问重复消息的帧类型,如该询问消息的帧类型可以为00。通话字段用于指示通话类型。如果该询问重复消息的通话类型与先前收到的询问消息中的通话类型不一致,则标签忽略该询问重复消息。可理解,关于通话字段的说明可以参考表2a所示的通话字段,这里不再一一详述。Wherein, the instruction field is used to indicate the frame type of the query repetition message, for example, the frame type of the query message may be 00. The call field is used to indicate the call type. If the call type of the query repeat message is inconsistent with the call type in the previously received query message, the tag ignores the query repeat message. It can be understood that, for the description of the conversation field, reference may be made to the conversation field shown in Table 2a, which will not be described in detail here.
示例性的,包括RN16的上行消息的内容可以如表3所示。Exemplarily, the content of the uplink message including RN16 may be as shown in Table 3.
表3table 3
the | 回应(reply)Reply |
比特数(#of bits)Number of bits (#of bits) | 1616 |
描述(description)description | RN16RN16 |
示例性的,上行消息的比特长度为16(如表3所示的比特数为16),且该上行消息的帧类型为RN16。Exemplarily, the bit length of the uplink message is 16 (the number of bits shown in Table 3 is 16), and the frame type of the uplink message is RN16.
进一步的,阅读器在接收到上行消息后,可以向该标签发送确认(acknowledge,ACK)消息,从而该标签在接收到ACK消息后可以向阅读器发送其标识信息。该标识信息可以包括电子产品编码(electronic product code,EPC)、扩展的产品编码(extended product code,XPC)或标签标识(tagidentification,TID)等。可理解,图2b是以EPC为例示出的,不应将其理解为对本申请实施例的限定。从而,阅读器在接收到该标识信息之后,再次发送询问消息,如此循环,直至完成2
Q-1个时间单元的轮询。
Further, after receiving the uplink message, the reader can send an acknowledgment (acknowledge, ACK) message to the tag, so that the tag can send its identification information to the reader after receiving the ACK message. The identification information may include an electronic product code (electronic product code, EPC), an extended product code (extended product code, XPC) or a tag identification (tag identification, TID) and the like. It can be understood that Fig. 2b shows an EPC as an example, which should not be construed as a limitation to this embodiment of the present application. Therefore, after receiving the identification information, the reader sends an inquiry message again, and so on, until the polling of 2Q -1 time units is completed.
示例性的,ACK消息的内容可以如表4所示。Exemplarily, the content of the ACK message may be as shown in Table 4.
表4Table 4
the | 指令instruction | RNRN |
比特数number of bits | 22 | 1616 |
描述describe | 0101 | 回应RN16Response to RN16 |
示例性的,指令字段用于指示该ACK的帧类型,如该ACK消息的帧类型可以为01。RN表示ACK消息确认的是随机数(random number,RN)字段所指示的RN16。Exemplarily, the instruction field is used to indicate the frame type of the ACK message, for example, the frame type of the ACK message may be 01. The RN indicates that the ACK message confirms the RN16 indicated by the random number (random number, RN) field.
可理解,ACK消息的比特长度为2,该ACK消息的帧类型为01。It can be understood that the bit length of the ACK message is 2, and the frame type of the ACK message is 01.
如图2b所示,第一标签随机选择的时间单元为第1个时间单元,则在该第1个时间单元中,第一标签可以向阅读器发送包括RN16的上行消息,以及接收阅读器发送的ACK消息,以及向阅读器发送EPC,从而完成一次轮询。第二标签随机选择的时间单元为第2个时间单元,在该第2个时间单元中,第二标签可以向阅读器发送包括RN16的上行消息,以及接收阅读器发送的ACK消息,以及向阅读器发送EPC。As shown in Figure 2b, the time unit randomly selected by the first tag is the first time unit, then in the first time unit, the first tag can send an uplink message including RN16 to the reader, receive the ACK message sent by the reader, and send an EPC to the reader, thus completing a poll. The time unit randomly selected by the second tag is the second time unit. In the second time unit, the second tag can send an uplink message including RN16 to the reader, receive the ACK message sent by the reader, and send an EPC to the reader.
以上所示的阅读器与标签的轮询方法中,当多个标签根据Q值随机确定的时间单元相同时,按照询问消息所指示的编码方式(如表2a所示的M),该多个标签由于同频同时的原因,该多个标签向阅读器发送上行消息时,便会产生碰撞。也就是说,在一个时间单元中,当有多个标签在相同的频域资源上向阅读器发送上行消息时,该多个消息会产生碰撞。从而,在该一个时间单元中,由于出现碰撞会导致阅读器无法对上行消息进行解析,导致该一个时间单元中的所有信息都被抛弃。同时,从表4所示的ACK消息也可以看出,ACK消息只能携带一个标签的RN16,即阅读器无法通知多个标签其上行消息被正确接收,也就无法使多个标签在收到ACK消息后上报其EPC信息。In the polling method of the reader and the tag shown above, when multiple tags randomly determine the same time unit according to the Q value, according to the encoding method indicated by the inquiry message (M shown in Table 2a), the multiple tags will collide when they send uplink messages to the reader due to the same frequency and simultaneous reasons. That is to say, in one time unit, when multiple tags send uplink messages to the reader on the same frequency domain resource, the multiple messages will collide. Therefore, in the one time unit, the reader cannot parse the uplink message due to a collision, and all the information in the one time unit is discarded. At the same time, it can also be seen from the ACK message shown in Table 4 that the ACK message can only carry the RN16 of one tag, that is, the reader cannot notify multiple tags that their uplink messages have been received correctly, and cannot make multiple tags report their EPC information after receiving the ACK message.
除了以上所示的碰撞的现象之外,以上所示的轮询方法中,还会出现以下现象:Q值与标签总数量不匹配:如Q值较小,则更多的标签会选择相同的时间单元,造成碰撞加剧。以上所示的轮询方法的理论接入效率S=有效时间单元的数量/总时间单元的数量=Ge
-G=36.8%,G=1,e为自然常数。可见以上所示的轮询方法的接入效率不高。
In addition to the phenomenon of collision shown above, in the polling method shown above, the following phenomenon will also occur: the Q value does not match the total number of tags: if the Q value is small, more tags will choose the same time unit, resulting in aggravated collisions. Theoretical access efficiency of the polling method shown above S=number of effective time units/number of total time units=Ge −G =36.8%, G=1, e is a natural constant. It can be seen that the access efficiency of the polling method shown above is not high.
鉴于此,本申请实施例提供一种通信方法及装置,能够有效改善多个标签选择同一个时间单元产生碰撞导致该时间单元内的所有信息被抛弃的情况,从而,不仅有效提高了无线射频识别系统的接入效率,而且还有效提高了时域资源的利用率。示例性的,在多个标签选择同一个时间单元时,本申请实施例提供的方法尽可能避免该多个标签使用相同的编码方式。该多个标签通过使用不同的编码方式,可有效改善该多个标签发送上行消息时而产生碰撞的 情况,即达到该多个标签并发发送上行消息而不碰撞的效果。In view of this, the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method and device, which can effectively improve the situation where multiple tags select the same time unit and collide, causing all information in the time unit to be discarded, thereby not only effectively improving the access efficiency of the radio frequency identification system, but also effectively improving the utilization rate of time domain resources. Exemplarily, when multiple tags select the same time unit, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application avoids as much as possible that the multiple tags use the same encoding mode. By using different encoding methods for the plurality of tags, the situation of collision when the plurality of tags send uplink messages can be effectively improved, that is, the effect that the plurality of tags send uplink messages concurrently without collision can be achieved.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种基于RFID的通信方法的交互示意图。示例性的,该通信方法可以应用于如图1所示的无线射频识别系统。又如,该通信方法可以应用于包括第一通信装置和第二通信装置的系统,该第一通信装置可以包括阅读器或应用于阅读器中的芯片等,该第二通信装置可以包括标签。又例如,该第一通信装置可以包括有源的网络设备(如有源的基站),第二通信装置可以包括无源的终端、半有源的终端或有源的终端等。可理解,关于无源的终端、半有源的终端和有源的终端的说明可以参考图1中关于标签的描述,这里不再一一列举。但凡第一通信装置和第二通信装置需要通过背反射通信实现交互,均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。Fig. 3 is an interactive schematic diagram of an RFID-based communication method provided by an embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, the communication method can be applied to a radio frequency identification system as shown in FIG. 1 . As another example, the communication method may be applied to a system including a first communication device and a second communication device, the first communication device may include a reader or a chip applied in the reader, and the second communication device may include a tag. For another example, the first communication device may include an active network device (such as an active base station), and the second communication device may include a passive terminal, a semi-active terminal, or an active terminal. It can be understood that for descriptions about passive terminals, semi-active terminals, and active terminals, reference may be made to the description about tags in FIG. 1 , and they will not be listed here. As long as the first communication device and the second communication device need to interact through back reflection communication, it falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application.
如图3所示,该方法包括:As shown in Figure 3, the method includes:
301、第一通信装置发送第一消息,该第一消息用于识别第二通信装置。对应的,第二通信装置接收该第一消息。301. The first communication device sends a first message, where the first message is used to identify the second communication device. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the first message.
第一消息包括指示信息、起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项。指示信息可以用于指示第二通信装置随机确定编码方式,或者,基于第二通信装置获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于第二通信装置获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式。以上所示的指示信息还可以统称为:指示信息用于指示第二通信装置根据预设规则确定第一编码方式。起始位置信息和长度信息用于确定参考序列,该参考序列可以用于与第二序列进行比较,该参考序列和第二序列的比较结果用于识别第二通信装置。第二通信装置可以基于起始位置信息、长度信息和第二序列确定其是否与第一通信装置进行交互(或轮询)。示例性的,起始位置信息表示第二通信装置截取数据的起始位置,长度信息表示该第二通信装置所截取的数据长度。基于该起始位置信息和长度信息,可使得第二通信装置基于起始位置信息所指示的起始位置从内存内容中截取一定长度的数据(即参考序列),该一定长度由长度信息指示。换句话说,起始位置信息和长度信息可以用于指示第二通信装置基于起始位置信息所指示的起始位置开始从内存内容中截取参考序列,该参考序列的长度由长度信息确定。可选的,内存内容可以包括文本类型(file type)、EPC、TID或单一的文本(如file_0)中的任一项。可选的,内存内容可以由第一通信装置预先设置,然后该第一通信装置以广播的方式广播该内存内容。可选的,内存内容可以由存储体信息指示。例如,该第一消息还可以包括存储体信息,该存储体信息用于指示存储体内容。The first message includes at least one item of indication information, starting position information, length information or the second sequence. The indication information may be used to instruct the second communication device to randomly determine the coding mode, or to determine the coding mode based on the sequence obtained by the second communication device, or to determine the coding mode based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the second communication device. The indication information shown above may also be collectively referred to as: the indication information is used to instruct the second communication apparatus to determine the first encoding manner according to a preset rule. The starting position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, which can be used for comparison with the second sequence, and the comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the second communication device. The second telecommunications device may determine whether it interacts (or polls) with the first telecommunications device based on the starting location information, the length information and the second sequence. Exemplarily, the starting position information indicates the starting position of the data intercepted by the second communication device, and the length information indicates the length of the data intercepted by the second communication device. Based on the start position information and the length information, the second communication device can intercept a certain length of data (ie, a reference sequence) from the memory content based on the start position indicated by the start position information, and the certain length is indicated by the length information. In other words, the starting position information and the length information may be used to instruct the second communication device to start extracting the reference sequence from the memory content based on the starting position indicated by the starting position information, and the length of the reference sequence is determined by the length information. Optionally, the memory content may include any one of text type (file type), EPC, TID or a single text (such as file_0). Optionally, the memory content may be preset by the first communication device, and then the first communication device broadcasts the memory content in a broadcast manner. Optionally, memory content may be indicated by storage volume information. For example, the first message may also include storage volume information, where the storage volume information is used to indicate storage volume content.
可选的,第一消息包括起始位置信息。则第二通信装置所截取的数据的长度和/或第二序列可以预先设置,如可以由标准定义,或者由第一通信装置预先设置,然后通过广播消息广播长度信息和/或第二序列。可选的,第一消息包括长度信息。则第二通信装置所需要的起始位置信息和/或第二序列可以预先设置,如可以由标准定义,或者由第一通信装置预先设置,然后通过广播消息广播起始位置信息和/或第二序列。可选的,第一消息包括起始位置信息和长度信息。由此,第二通信装置可以根据该第一消息中所包括的起始位置信息和长度信息确定参考序列。第二序列可以预先设置。可选的,第一消息包括起始位置信息、长度信息和第二序列。可理解,在第一消息不包括指示信息的情况下,第二通信装置可以自主确定基于预设规则确定第一编码方式(如基于预设规则中的任一种规则确定第一编码方式)。同时,第二通信装置不基于第二消息中所指示的M确定编码方式。关于第一编码方式的确定方法可以参考下文,这里先不一一详述。Optionally, the first message includes starting location information. Then the length and/or the second sequence of the data intercepted by the second communication device may be preset, such as defined by a standard, or preset by the first communication device, and then broadcast the length information and/or the second sequence through a broadcast message. Optionally, the first message includes length information. The starting position information and/or the second sequence required by the second communication device may be preset, such as defined by a standard, or preset by the first communication device, and then broadcast the starting position information and/or the second sequence through a broadcast message. Optionally, the first message includes starting position information and length information. Thus, the second communication device can determine the reference sequence according to the start position information and the length information included in the first message. The second sequence can be preset. Optionally, the first message includes starting position information, length information and a second sequence. It can be understood that, in the case that the first message does not include the indication information, the second communication device may autonomously determine the first encoding method based on preset rules (eg, determine the first encoding method based on any one of the preset rules). Meanwhile, the second communication device does not determine the coding mode based on M indicated in the second message. For the determination method of the first encoding mode, reference may be made to the following, and details will not be described here.
可选的,第一消息包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,以及该第一消息包括指示信息。该情况下,第一消息通过包括指示信息,可使得第二通信装置明确获知 其可以基于预设规则确定第一编码方式(如基于预设规则中的任一种规则确定第一编码方式)。同时,第二通信装置可以不基于第二消息中所指示的M确定编码方式。Optionally, the first message includes at least one item of starting position information, length information, or the second sequence, and the first message includes indication information. In this case, by including the indication information in the first message, the second communication device can clearly know that it can determine the first encoding method based on preset rules (such as determining the first encoding method based on any rule in the preset rules). Meanwhile, the second communication device may not determine the encoding mode based on M indicated in the second message.
可选的,第一消息包括起始位置信息、长度信息、第二序列和指示信息。Optionally, the first message includes starting position information, length information, the second sequence and indication information.
示例性的,第一消息所包括的指示信息的取值可以为101、110或111中的任一项。例如,指示信息可以位于第一消息中的目标(target)字段,当该目标字段的取值为000、001、010、011或100中的任一项时,该目标字段可以用于指示已盘标记。而当目标字段的取值为101、110或111中的任一项时,则该目标字段可以用于指示第二通信装置基于预设规则确定第一编码方式(如第二通信装置随机确定第一编码方式,或者,基于第二通信装置获取到的序列确定第一编码方式,或者,基于第二通信装置获取到的接收信号能量强度确定第一编码方式)。如表1至表4所示的通信方法,由于每个标签是基于询问消息中的M的取值来确定编码方式,因此每个标签的编码方式是相同的。相对而言,本申请实施例所示的指示信息则用于指示开启多编码方式,或者,该指示信息用于指示第二通信装置可以自主确定编码方式,或者,该指示信息用于指示多编码方式的交互,或者,该指示信息用于指示允许至少两个第二通信装置使用不同的编码方式。本申请实施例对于指示信息的说明不作限定,但凡第二通信装置能够基于该指示信息自主确定编码方式,或者,但凡基于该指示信息,使得至少两个第二通信装置所使用的编码方式不同,均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。Exemplarily, the value of the indication information included in the first message may be any one of 101, 110 or 111. For example, the indication information may be located in a target (target) field in the first message, and when the value of the target field is any one of 000, 001, 010, 011 or 100, the target field may be used to indicate a disk already marked. And when the value of the target field is any one of 101, 110 or 111, the target field can be used to instruct the second communication device to determine the first coding method based on preset rules (such as the second communication device randomly determines the first coding method, or determines the first coding method based on the sequence obtained by the second communication device, or determines the first coding method based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the second communication device). For the communication methods shown in Table 1 to Table 4, since each tag determines the encoding method based on the value of M in the inquiry message, the encoding method of each tag is the same. In contrast, the indication information shown in the embodiment of the present application is used to indicate that a multi-coding mode is enabled, or the indication information is used to indicate that the second communication device can independently determine a coding mode, or the indication information is used to indicate the interaction of multiple coding modes, or the indication information is used to indicate that at least two second communication devices are allowed to use different coding modes. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the description of the instruction information, as long as the second communication device can independently determine the encoding method based on the instruction information, or, based on the instruction information, the encoding methods used by at least two second communication devices are different, all belong to the protection scope of the embodiment of the application.
示例性的,关于第一消息的说明还可以参考上文关于表1的描述,如起始位置信息可以参考表1所示的指针字段的说明,长度信息可以参考表1所示的长度字段的说明,第二序列可以参考表1所示的掩模字段的说明,存储体信息可以参考表1所示的存储体字段的说明等,这里不再一一详述。Exemplarily, for the description of the first message, refer to the above description of Table 1. For example, for the start position information, refer to the description of the pointer field shown in Table 1, for the length information, refer to the description of the length field shown in Table 1, for the second sequence, refer to the description of the mask field shown in Table 1, and for the storage bank information, refer to the description of the storage bank field shown in Table 1, etc., which will not be described in detail here.
可理解,以上所示的第一消息包括指示信息、起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,还可以理解为:第一消息包括目标字段,且该目标字段的取值为101、110或111中的任一项;指针字段;长度字段或掩模字段中的至少一项。关于第一消息中可能包括的其他字段的说明参考表1,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that the first message shown above includes at least one item of indication information, starting position information, length information or the second sequence, and can also be understood as: the first message includes a target field, and the value of the target field is any one of 101, 110 or 111; a pointer field; at least one of a length field or a mask field. For descriptions of other fields that may be included in the first message, refer to Table 1, which will not be detailed here.
302、第一通信装置发送第二消息,该第二消息用于指示第二通信装置上报序列。302. The first communication device sends a second message, where the second message is used to instruct the second communication device to report a sequence.
对应的,第二通信装置接收该第二消息。Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the second message.
示例性的,第一通信装置可以通过广播的形式发送第二消息。例如,该第一通信装置可以向至少两个第二通信装置广播第二消息。Exemplarily, the first communication device may send the second message in a broadcast form. For example, the first communication device may broadcast the second message to at least two second communication devices.
示例性的,该第二消息包括用于指示Q值的信息,该Q值可以用于指示时间单元的数量。例如,第二通信装置基于该Q值可获知其需要随机在2
Q-1个时间单元中选择一个时间单元,从而在该时间单元中与第一通信装置进行信息的交互。关于Q值的说明可以参考表2a的相关描述,这里不再一一详述。示例性的,该第二消息还可以称为询问消息或询问重复消息(如包括图2b所示的query或queryreq)。关于该第二消息的说明可以参考表2a和/或表2b所示的描述。需要说明的是,第二通信装置可以不基于M的取值确定编码方式。而是基于预设规则确定编码方式。示例性的,第二通信装置可以基于该第一消息中的指示信息明确获知其不需要基于M的取值确定编码方式。
Exemplarily, the second message includes information used to indicate the Q value, and the Q value may be used to indicate the number of time units. For example, based on the Q value, the second communication device may know that it needs to randomly select a time unit in 2Q -1 time units, so as to perform information interaction with the first communication device in the time unit. For the description of the Q value, you can refer to the related description in Table 2a, which will not be described in detail here. Exemplarily, the second message may also be called a query message or a query repeat message (such as including query or queryreq shown in FIG. 2b ). For the description of the second message, reference may be made to the description shown in Table 2a and/or Table 2b. It should be noted that the second communication device may not determine the encoding mode based on the value of M. Instead, the encoding method is determined based on preset rules. Exemplarily, the second communication device may know explicitly based on the indication information in the first message that it does not need to determine the encoding mode based on the value of M.
303、第二通信装置基于第一编码方式向第一通信装置发送第三消息,该第三消息包括第一序列。对应的,第一通信装置接收该第三消息。303. The second communication device sends a third message to the first communication device based on the first encoding manner, where the third message includes the first sequence. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives the third message.
其中,第一编码方式可以基于预设规则确定。或者,第一编码方式基于如下任一项或多项确定:第一编码方式是第二通信装置随机确定的;第一编码方式是基于第二通信装置获取到的序列确定的;第一编码方式是基于第二通信装置获取到的接收信号能量强度确定的。Wherein, the first encoding manner may be determined based on preset rules. Alternatively, the first coding method is determined based on any one or more of the following: the first coding method is randomly determined by the second communication device; the first coding method is determined based on the sequence obtained by the second communication device; the first coding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the second communication device.
示例性的,在第二通信装置基于Q值随机选择的时间单元(如第一时间单元)与第一通信装置发送的第二消息所在的时间单元一致的情况下,该第二通信装置在第一时间单元中可以基于第一编码方式发送第三消息。第一序列的比特长度可以是16个比特,或者,大于16个比特(如12个比特或8个比特等),或者,小于16个比特(如20个比特或24个比特)等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。可理解,关于第三消息的说明还可以参考表3所示的上行消息,这里不再一一详述。Exemplarily, in the case that the time unit randomly selected by the second communication device based on the Q value (such as the first time unit) is consistent with the time unit where the second message sent by the first communication device is located, the second communication device may send the third message based on the first encoding method in the first time unit. The bit length of the first sequence may be 16 bits, or greater than 16 bits (such as 12 bits or 8 bits, etc.), or less than 16 bits (such as 20 bits or 24 bits), etc., which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. It can be understood that, for the description about the third message, reference may also be made to the uplink messages shown in Table 3, which will not be described in detail here.
需要说明的是,表3所示的方法中,第二通信装置发送上行消息时所采用的编码方式是基于询问消息中的M的取值确定的。然而,本申请实施例所示的方法中,第二通信装置发送第三消息时所采用的第一编码方式是基于预设规则确定的。同时,表3所示的方法中,每个标签所采用的编码方式是相同的,然而,本申请实施例所示的方法中,由于第二通信装置可以自主地基于预设规则确定编码方式,因此可以存在至少两个第二通信装置所采用的编码方式是不同的。也就是说,本申请实施例所示的方法中,当至少两个第二通信装置分别向第一通信装置发送第三消息时,该至少两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式可以不同,或者,该至少两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式是不同的。可理解,由于第二通信装置是通过基带处理器生成第三消息的,因此,本申请实施例所示的编码方式还可以称为基带编码方式。It should be noted that, in the method shown in Table 3, the encoding method adopted by the second communication device when sending the uplink message is determined based on the value of M in the inquiry message. However, in the method shown in the embodiment of the present application, the first encoding method adopted by the second communication device when sending the third message is determined based on preset rules. At the same time, in the method shown in Table 3, the encoding method adopted by each tag is the same. However, in the method shown in the embodiment of the present application, since the second communication device can determine the encoding method autonomously based on preset rules, there may be at least two second communication devices that use different encoding methods. That is to say, in the method shown in the embodiment of the present application, when at least two second communication devices respectively send the third message to the first communication device, the encoding methods adopted by the at least two second communication devices may be different, or the encoding methods adopted by the at least two second communication devices are different. It can be understood that, since the second communication device generates the third message through the baseband processor, the encoding manner shown in the embodiment of the present application may also be referred to as a baseband encoding manner.
示例性的,在同一个时间单元中,向第一通信装置发送第三消息的至少两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式不同。由此,即使是在同一个时间单元中,但是,由于该至少两个第二通信装置中每个第二通信装置所采用的编码方式不同,因此第一通信装置可以采用不同的滤波方法解码第三消息,使得该第一通信装置可以恢复出每个第三消息。通过本申请实施例提供的方法,有效改善了该至少两个第二通信装置发生碰撞的情况,尽可能减少该至少两个第二通信装置发生碰撞的情况,从而,尽可能避免了在同一个时间单元中的信息被抛弃的情况,有效提高了时域资源的利用率。Exemplarily, in the same time unit, at least two second communication devices that send the third message to the first communication device use different encoding methods. Thus, even in the same time unit, since each of the at least two second communication devices adopts a different encoding method, the first communication device can use different filtering methods to decode the third message, so that the first communication device can recover each third message. Through the method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the situation that the at least two second communication devices collide is effectively improved, and the situation that the at least two second communication devices collide is reduced as much as possible, thereby avoiding the situation that information in the same time unit is discarded as much as possible, and effectively improving the utilization rate of time domain resources.
示例性的,在同一个时间单元中,可以有两个第二通信装置发送第三消息,且该两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式不同。例如,其中一个第二通信装置采用M=2的米勒编码方式,另一个第二通信装置采用M=4的米勒编码方式。又例如,在同一个时间单元中,可以有三个第二通信装置发送第三消息,且该三个第二通信装置采用的编码方式不同。例如,该三个第二通信装置所采用的编码方式可以是FM0方法、M=2的米勒(miller)编码方式(可以简称为miller-2)、M=4的米勒编码方式(可以简称为miller-4)、M=8的米勒编码方式(可以简称为miller-8)中的任三个。又例如,在同一个时间单元中,可以有四个第二通信装置发送第三消息,且该四个第二通信装置采用的编码方式不同。例如,该四个第二通信装置所采用的编码方式分别是FM0方法、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。本申请实施例是以编码方式包括四种编码方式为例示出的,当编码方式的种类越多时,则允许在同一个时间单元内发送第三消息的第二通信装置的数量也越多。Exemplarily, in the same time unit, there may be two second communication devices sending the third message, and the encoding methods adopted by the two second communication devices are different. For example, one of the second communication devices adopts the Miller coding mode of M=2, and the other second communication device adopts the Miller coding mode of M=4. For another example, in the same time unit, there may be three second communication devices sending the third message, and the encoding methods adopted by the three second communication devices are different. For example, the coding methods adopted by the three second communication devices may be any three of the FMO method, the Miller coding method with M=2 (which may be referred to as miller-2 for short), the Miller coding method with M=4 (which may be referred to as miller-4 for short), and the Miller coding method with M=8 (which may be referred to as miller-8 for short). For another example, in the same time unit, there may be four second communication devices sending the third message, and the four second communication devices use different encoding methods. For example, the coding schemes adopted by the four second communication devices are the FMO method, the Miller coding scheme with M=2, the Miller coding scheme with M=4, and the Miller coding scheme with M=8. In this embodiment of the present application, the encoding method includes four encoding methods as an example. When there are more types of encoding methods, the number of second communication devices that are allowed to send the third message within the same time unit is also greater.
当然,本申请实施例所示的方法,也可能存在如下方案:在同一个时间单元中,向第一通信装置发送第三消息的至少两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式相同。尽管,本申请实施例提供的方法中,在同一个时间单元中,可以存在至少两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式相同,但是,由于每个第二通信装置都是基于预设规则确定编码方式,因此有很大的可能性存在在同一个时间单元中,至少两个第二通信装置采用的编码方式不同,因此,采用本申请实施例所示的方法,尽可能地减少了不同的第二通信装置因为同时同频的原因所产生的碰撞,从而提高了第二通信装置的接入效率。例如,当每个标签都采用其获取到的序列确定编码方式时,由于各个标签所获取到的序列有很大可能是不同的。又例如,当每个标签都采用各自获取到 的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式时,由于每个标签与阅读器之间的信号质量存在不同,因此,各个标签所获取到的接收信号能量强度有很大可能是不同的。因此,本申请实施例提供的方法能够尽可能改善同一个时间单元中,至少两个第二通信装置采用相同的编码方式的情况。可理解,本申请实施例中,不同第二通信装置所采用的预设规则可以是相同的。例如,不同第二通信装置都可以随机确定编码方式;或者,不同第二通信装置都可以基于各自获取到的第一序列确定编码方式;或者,不同第二通信装置都可以基于各自获取到的第二序列确定编码方式;或者,不同第二通信装置都可以基于各自获取到的参考序列确定编码方式;或者,不同第二通信装置都可以基于各自获取到的参考序列与第二序列的比较结果确定编码方式;或者,不同第二通信装置都可以基于各自获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式。当然,不同第二通信装置也可以采用不同的预设规则确定编码方式。Certainly, the following scheme may also exist in the method shown in the embodiment of the present application: in the same time unit, at least two second communication devices that send the third message to the first communication device use the same encoding method. Although, in the method provided in the embodiment of the present application, there may be at least two second communication devices using the same coding method in the same time unit, but since each second communication device determines the coding method based on preset rules, there is a high possibility that in the same time unit, at least two second communication devices use different coding methods. Therefore, using the method shown in the embodiment of the present application reduces the collisions caused by different second communication devices due to the same frequency at the same time as much as possible, thereby improving the access efficiency of the second communication device. For example, when each tag uses its obtained sequence to determine the encoding method, the sequences obtained by each tag are likely to be different. For another example, when each tag adopts its own received signal energy strength to determine the encoding method, since the signal quality between each tag and the reader is different, the received signal energy strength obtained by each tag is very likely to be different. Therefore, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can improve as much as possible the situation that at least two second communication devices use the same encoding mode in the same time unit. It can be understood that in this embodiment of the present application, the preset rules adopted by different second communication devices may be the same. For example, different second communication devices can randomly determine the encoding method; or, different second communication devices can determine the encoding method based on the first sequence obtained respectively; or, different second communication devices can determine the encoding method based on the second sequence obtained respectively; or, different second communication devices can determine the encoding method based on the reference sequence obtained respectively; Of course, different second communication devices may also use different preset rules to determine the encoding manner.
本申请实施例提供的方法,能够有效改善在同一时间单元中,当出现两个及两个以上的第二通信装置同时接入系统并发送第三消息产生碰撞的问题。基于图2b所示的方法,在该同一个时间单元中的消息会因为第二通信装置碰撞而无法解析,导致这个时间单元中的所有信息被抛弃,同时这个时间单元也会被作废。然而,本申请实施例提供的方法,通过尽可能地保证第二通信装置发送第三消息时使用不同的编码方式,从而达到并发上行而不碰撞的效果,提高时域资源的利用率。The method provided by the embodiment of the present application can effectively improve the problem of collision when two or more second communication devices simultaneously access the system and send the third message in the same time unit. Based on the method shown in FIG. 2b, the messages in the same time unit cannot be parsed due to the collision of the second communication device, resulting in discarding all the information in this time unit, and at the same time, this time unit will also be invalidated. However, the method provided by the embodiment of the present application ensures that the second communication device uses different encoding methods when sending the third message as much as possible, so as to achieve the effect of concurrent uplink without collision and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图3所示的方法还包括步骤304和步骤305。In a possible implementation manner, the method shown in FIG. 3 further includes step 304 and step 305 .
304、第一通信装置向第二通信装置发送ACK消息,该ACK消息用于确认一个或多个第一序列。对应的,第二通信装置接收该ACK消息。304. The first communications apparatus sends an ACK message to the second communications apparatus, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more first sequences. Correspondingly, the second communication device receives the ACK message.
可选的,ACK消息用于确认一个第一序列。例如,一个第二通信装置随机选择的时间单元与第一通信装置发送的第二消息所在的时间单元相同,则第一通信装置可以确认该第二通信装置所发送的第三消息,或者,确认该第二通信装置发送的第一序列。Optionally, the ACK message is used to confirm a first sequence. For example, if the time unit randomly selected by a second communication device is the same as the time unit of the second message sent by the first communication device, the first communication device may confirm the third message sent by the second communication device, or confirm the first sequence sent by the second communication device.
ACK消息用于确认至少两个第一序列(也可以称为多个第一序列)。例如,至少两个第二通信装置随机选择的时间单元与第一通信装置发送的第二消息所在的时间单元相同,则该第一通信装置可以对该至少两个第二通信装置所发送的第一序列进行确认。The ACK message is used to confirm at least two first sequences (also referred to as multiple first sequences). For example, the time unit randomly selected by at least two second communication devices is the same as the time unit of the second message sent by the first communication device, then the first communication device may confirm the first sequence sent by the at least two second communication devices.
示例性的,ACK消息的内容可以如表5所示。Exemplarily, the content of the ACK message may be as shown in Table 5.
表5table 5
指令(command)command | RN16(T1)RN16(T1) | RN16(T2)RN16(T2) | ……... | RN16(Tn)RN16(Tn) |
可选的,ACK消息的比特长度可以是固定的。例如,ACK消息的比特长度可以基于第三消息中所包括的第一序列的长度以及参考数值(如可以表示为Tn)确定。例如,该参考数值可以是编码方式的种类,如以包括四种编码方式为例,则参考数值可以为4。又例如,该参考数值可以是一个时间单元中允许发送上行消息(如包括第三消息或ACK消息)的第二通信装置的数量。对于该参考数值的取值不作限定。示例性的,ACK消息的比特长度可以为64个比特。该情况下,当在第一时间单元中,有四个第二通信装置分别发送第三消息时,且该四个第二通信装置中每两个第二通信装置所使用的编码方式不同。则ACK消息可以对该四个第二通信装置中每个第二通信装置发送的第三消息进行确认。当然,如果第一通信装置未正确解码其中的至少一个第二通信装置(如一个第二通信装置),则ACK消息可以对正确解码的第三消息进行确认。该情况下,ACK消息中空余出的16个比特,可以填充固定值。Optionally, the bit length of the ACK message may be fixed. For example, the bit length of the ACK message may be determined based on the length of the first sequence included in the third message and a reference value (such as may be expressed as Tn). For example, the reference value may be the type of encoding method. For example, if four encoding methods are included, the reference value may be 4. For another example, the reference value may be the number of second communication devices allowed to send an uplink message (eg, including a third message or an ACK message) in a time unit. The value of the reference value is not limited. Exemplarily, the bit length of the ACK message may be 64 bits. In this case, when there are four second communication devices respectively sending the third message in the first time unit, and the encoding methods used by every two second communication devices among the four second communication devices are different. Then the ACK message may confirm the third message sent by each of the four second communication devices. Of course, if at least one of the second communication devices (such as a second communication device) is not correctly decoded by the first communication device, the ACK message may confirm the correctly decoded third message. In this case, the 16 vacant bits in the ACK message can be filled with fixed values.
可选的,ACK消息的比特长度也可以是不固定的,而是随着第一通信装置所确认的第三消息的数量变化。该情况下,由于ACK消息的比特长度不固定,为使得第二通信装置能够正确解码该ACK消息,因此,该ACK消息还可能包括用于指示ACK消息的比特长度的信息。Optionally, the bit length of the ACK message may not be fixed, but changes with the number of third messages acknowledged by the first communication device. In this case, since the bit length of the ACK message is not fixed, in order to enable the second communication device to correctly decode the ACK message, the ACK message may further include information indicating the bit length of the ACK message.
可理解,表5所示的RN16(T1)、RN16(T2)至RN16(Tn)表示不同的第二通信装置的RN16。It can be understood that RN16 ( T1 ), RN16 ( T2 ) to RN16 ( Tn ) shown in Table 5 represent different RN16 of the second communication device.
可理解,本申请实施例所示的ACK消息还可以称为确认消息。It can be understood that the ACK message shown in the embodiment of the present application may also be called an acknowledgment message.
305、第二通信装置基于第一编码方式向第一通信装置发送第二通信装置的标识信息。对应的,第一通信装置接收该标识信息。305. The second communication device sends the identification information of the second communication device to the first communication device based on the first encoding manner. Correspondingly, the first communication device receives the identification information.
示例性的,第二通信装置的标识信息可以包括EPC、XPC或TID等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。以标识信息可以包括EPC或XPC为例,如第二通信装置可以自主决定向第一通信装置发送EPC或XPC。可选的,第二通信装置还可以向第一通信装置发送用于指示EPC或XPC的信息,从而,第一通信装置可以基于该用于指示EPC或XPC的信息获知第二通信装置发送的标识信息是EPC还是XPC。Exemplarily, the identification information of the second communication device may include EPC, XPC, or TID, etc., which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. Taking the identification information including EPC or XPC as an example, for example, the second communication device may independently decide to send the EPC or XPC to the first communication device. Optionally, the second communication device may also send information indicating EPC or XPC to the first communication device, so that the first communication device may know whether the identification information sent by the second communication device is EPC or XPC based on the information indicating EPC or XPC.
本申请实施例中,当第二通信装置接收到ACK消息之后,其可以基于第一编码方式向第一通信装置发送标识信息。也就是说,第二通信装置发送第三消息的编码方式与发送标识信息的编码方式相同。同时,第二通信装置发送第三消息所在的时间单元与发送标识信息所在的时间单元相同。In this embodiment of the present application, after the second communication device receives the ACK message, it may send identification information to the first communication device based on the first encoding manner. That is to say, the encoding manner of sending the third message by the second communication device is the same as the encoding manner of sending the identification information. Meanwhile, the time unit at which the second communication device sends the third message is the same as the time unit at which the identification information is sent.
本申请实施例中,通过指示信息确定编码方式,使得位于同一个时间单元内的第二通信装置尽可能地采用不同的编码方式,从而第一通信装置可以有效地恢复出来自不同第二通信装置的消息,有效改善了由于碰撞而丢弃信息的情况,提高了时域资源的利用率。In the embodiment of the present application, the encoding method is determined by indicating information, so that the second communication devices located in the same time unit adopt different encoding methods as much as possible, so that the first communication device can effectively recover messages from different second communication devices, effectively improve the situation of discarding information due to collisions, and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
以下将以第一通信装置包括阅读器,第二通信装置包括标签为例详细说明本申请实施例涉及的编码方式。关于图3所示的通信方法中涉及的编码方式可以参考下文所示,同时,下文所示的编码方式中所涉及的通信方法可以参考图3,下文不再一一详述。Hereinafter, the encoding method involved in the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail by taking the first communication device including a reader and the second communication device including a tag as an example. For the encoding method involved in the communication method shown in FIG. 3 , refer to the following, and at the same time, refer to FIG. 3 for the communication method involved in the encoding method shown below, which will not be described in detail below.
可理解,本申请实施例所示的时间单元指的是在一个时间单元内阅读器与标签可以完成如图3所示的交互过程;或者,在一个时间单元内阅读器与标签可以完成一次轮询。也就是说,本申请实施例对于一个时间单元的具体时长不作限定。只要阅读器与标签之间通过交互,使得该阅读器获得了该标签的标识信息则可以称为这次交互位于一个时间单元中。例如,在一个时间单元内,阅读器可以向标签发送第二消息,标签向阅读器发送第三消息,然后阅读器向标签发送ACK消息,标签向阅读器发送该标签的标识信息。以上所示的第二消息、第三消息、ACK消息和标识信息可以称为一次轮询,其是在一个时间单元内完成的。可理解,本申请实施例对于第一消息的发送时间或接收时间是否需要位于一个时间单元内不作限定。关于时间单元的说明还可以参考上文关于图2a和图2b。It can be understood that the time unit shown in the embodiment of the present application means that the reader and the tag can complete the interaction process shown in FIG. 3 within one time unit; or, the reader and the tag can complete one polling within one time unit. That is to say, the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific duration of one time unit. As long as the interaction between the reader and the tag enables the reader to obtain the identification information of the tag, it can be said that this interaction is within one time unit. For example, within a time unit, the reader may send a second message to the tag, the tag sends a third message to the reader, then the reader sends an ACK message to the tag, and the tag sends the tag's identification information to the reader. The above-mentioned second message, third message, ACK message and identification information may be called one polling, which is completed within one time unit. It can be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, there is no limitation on whether the sending time or the receiving time of the first message needs to be within one time unit. For the description of time units reference can also be made to the above in relation to Figures 2a and 2b.
在一种可能的实现方式中,以下所示的不同标签使用不同的编码方式可以是针对同一个时间单元来说的。如第一标签和第二标签所选择的时间单元相同,则在该时间单元中,第一标签和第二标签基于预设规则确定的编码方式可以不同。该情况下,第一标签和第二标签通过使用不同的编码方式,可有效保证阅读器能够正确区分出该第一标签的第三消息和第二标签的第三消息,或者,第一标签的标识信息和第二标签的标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, different encoding methods for different tags shown below may be for the same time unit. If the time units selected by the first label and the second label are the same, then in the time unit, the encoding methods determined by the first label and the second label based on preset rules may be different. In this case, by using different encoding methods for the first tag and the second tag, it can effectively ensure that the reader can correctly distinguish the third message of the first tag from the third message of the second tag, or the identification information of the first tag and the identification information of the second tag.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,以下所示的不同标签使用不同的编码方式也可以是针对不同的时间单元来说,如第一标签和第二标签所选择的时间单元不同,则第一标签和第二标签分别在自己所选择的时间单元中可以使用不同的编码方式。In another possible implementation, the different encoding methods shown below for different tags may also be for different time units. If the time units selected by the first tag and the second tag are different, then the first tag and the second tag may use different encoding methods in their selected time units.
在又一种可能的实现方式中,在第一标签和第二标签所选择的时间单元不同时,该第一标签和第二标签也可以使用相同的编码方式。In yet another possible implementation manner, when the time units selected by the first label and the second label are different, the first label and the second label may also use the same encoding manner.
至于第一标签和第二标签具体所使用的编码方式可以是基于预设规则确定的,关于预设 规则的说明可以参考下文。可理解,以上是以第一标签和第二标签为例示出的,该第一标签和第二标签均可以理解为第二通信装置,同时,选择相同的时间单元的标签的数量可以包括2个、3个或4个等,不应将本申请实施例所示的第一标签和第二标签理解为对本申请实施例的限定。As for the specific encoding methods used by the first label and the second label, they may be determined based on preset rules, and the description of the preset rules may refer to the following. It can be understood that the above is illustrated with the first tag and the second tag as examples, and the first tag and the second tag can be understood as the second communication device. At the same time, the number of tags that select the same time unit can include 2, 3, or 4, etc. The first tag and the second tag shown in the embodiment of the present application should not be interpreted as limiting the embodiment of the present application.
需要说明的是,也可能存在如下情况:至少三个标签选择的时间单元相同,该至少三个标签中有两个标签所确定的编码方式相同,其余标签所确定的编码方式不同。该情况下,由于其余标签确定的编码方式不同,因此阅读器仍可以确定出所选择不同编码方式的标签发送的第三消息和/或标识信息。It should be noted that the following situation may also exist: at least three tags select the same time unit, two of the at least three tags determine the same encoding mode, and the remaining tags determine different encoding modes. In this case, since the encoding methods determined by the remaining tags are different, the reader can still determine the third message and/or identification information sent by the selected tags with different encoding methods.
本申请实施例中,针对不同的第二通信装置来说,第二通信装置使用不同的编码方式还可以有如下理解:第二通信装置所使用的频点不同,或者,第二通信装置所使用的频率不同,或者,第二通信装置所使用的调制频率不同,或者,第二通信装置所使用的副载波效果不同,或者,第二通信装置所使用的副载波频率不同,或者,第二通信装置所对应的基带频谱不同。In this embodiment of the present application, for different second communication devices, the use of different encoding methods by the second communication device can also be understood as follows: the frequency point used by the second communication device is different, or the frequency used by the second communication device is different, or the modulation frequency used by the second communication device is different, or the effect of the subcarrier used by the second communication device is different, or the frequency of the subcarrier used by the second communication device is different, or the baseband spectrum corresponding to the second communication device is different.
示例性的,以EPC-Gen2 UHF中规定的如下四种编码方式:FM0、Miller-2、Miller-4、Miller-8为例,则对于这四种编码方式可以如图4a和图4b所示。基于图4a和图4b,当标签使用不同的编码调制阅读器的载波频率并反射至阅读器后,在阅读器载波频率附近出现不同的副载波频率分量,这些副载波频率可以等于其自身的基带编码速率。也就是说,不同的编码方式可以对应不同的副载波效果,对应不同的副载波频率,如图4a和图4b所示的副载波频率。Exemplarily, taking the following four encoding methods specified in EPC-Gen2 UHF: FM0, Miller-2, Miller-4, and Miller-8 as examples, these four encoding methods can be shown in Figure 4a and Figure 4b. Based on Figure 4a and Figure 4b, when the tag modulates the carrier frequency of the reader with different codes and reflects to the reader, different subcarrier frequency components appear near the carrier frequency of the reader, and these subcarrier frequencies can be equal to its own baseband code rate. That is to say, different coding methods may correspond to different subcarrier effects and different subcarrier frequencies, such as the subcarrier frequencies shown in Fig. 4a and Fig. 4b.
示例性的,如图4a所示的FM0编码方式所示,FM0编码在每个符号的边界处会进行相位翻转。在符号0处会出现符号内中间处的相位翻转。符号0会出现两次相位翻转,分别位于符号的起始位置和符号中间位置。而符号1则只会出现一次相位翻转,位于符号的起始位置。示例性的,如图4b所示的M=2、M=4和M=8编码方式所示,基带编码特征为符号1内会出现相位翻转。符号0内不会出现相位翻转,但连续两个符号0之间会出现相位翻转。米勒基带编码与具有特定周期的方波脉冲序列相乘构成了如图4b所示的米勒副载波序列(也可以称为副载波频率)。可理解,本申请实施例所示的M的取值可以理解为是一个符号内包括的方波个数,该方波包括一个高电平和一个低电平。例如,M=2时,一个符号内包括两个方波,该两个方波包括两个高电平和两个低电平。又例如,M=4时,一个符号内包括四个方波,该四个方波包括四个高电平和四个低电平。又例如,M=8时,一个符号内包括八个方波,该八个方波包括八个高电平和八个低电平。Exemplarily, as shown in the FMO encoding manner shown in FIG. 4 a , the phase of the FMO encoding will be reversed at the boundary of each symbol. A phase flip in the middle of the symbol occurs at symbol 0. There will be two phase inversions for symbol 0, which are located at the start position of the symbol and the middle position of the symbol respectively. For symbol 1, there will only be one phase flip, at the beginning of the symbol. Exemplarily, as shown in the M=2, M=4 and M=8 coding modes shown in FIG. There will be no phase inversion within a symbol 0, but a phase inversion will occur between two consecutive symbol 0s. The Miller baseband code is multiplied by a square wave pulse sequence with a specific period to form a Miller subcarrier sequence (also called a subcarrier frequency) as shown in FIG. 4b. It can be understood that the value of M shown in the embodiment of the present application can be understood as the number of square waves included in one symbol, and the square wave includes a high level and a low level. For example, when M=2, one symbol includes two square waves, and the two square waves include two high levels and two low levels. For another example, when M=4, one symbol includes four square waves, and the four square waves include four high levels and four low levels. For another example, when M=8, one symbol includes eight square waves, and the eight square waves include eight high levels and eight low levels.
可理解,关于FM0、M=2的编码方式、M=4的编码方式和M=8的编码方式的具体编码方式,本申请实施例不作限定。It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit specific encoding manners of FM0, the encoding manner of M=2, the encoding manner of M=4, and the encoding manner of M=8.
图4c是本申请实施例提供的一种编码方式与载波频率之间的示意图。如图4c所示,阅读器通过载波频率f0向第一标签、第二标签和第三标签分别发送第二消息。该载波频率f0还可以理解为是阅读器发送的用于标签调制或反射的载波频率。例如,第一标签基于miller-2调制f0,获得副载波频率f1,则第一标签可以通过该副载波频率f1+载波频率f0发送第三消息。又如第二标签基于miller-4调制f0,获得副载波频率f2,则第二标签可以通过该副载波频率f2+载波频率f0发送第三消息。又如第三标签基于miller-8调制f0,获得副载波频率f3,则第三标签可以通过该副载波频率f3+载波频率f0发送第三消息。也就是说,不同的标签在反射载波频率并调制自身的信息到副载波频率时,从频率上看,调制信息可以作为副载波频率的形式存在于阅读器载波频率的附近,该副载波的调制频率即为标签的编码速率。其中,M越大,则编码速率越大,副载波频率越大。可理解,本申请实施例对于第三消息的说明同 样适用于标识信息,这里不再一一详述。可理解,关于第一标签、第二标签和第三标签各自的时间单元的说明可以参考上文,这里不再详述。Fig. 4c is a schematic diagram between a coding method and a carrier frequency provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Fig. 4c, the reader sends second messages to the first tag, the second tag and the third tag respectively through the carrier frequency f0. The carrier frequency f0 can also be understood as the carrier frequency sent by the reader for tag modulation or reflection. For example, the first tag modulates f0 based on miller-2 to obtain the subcarrier frequency f1, then the first tag can send the third message through the subcarrier frequency f1+carrier frequency f0. Another example is that the second tag modulates f0 based on miller-4 to obtain the subcarrier frequency f2, then the second tag can send the third message through the subcarrier frequency f2+carrier frequency f0. Another example is that the third tag obtains the subcarrier frequency f3 based on the miller-8 modulation f0, then the third tag can send the third message through the subcarrier frequency f3+carrier frequency f0. That is to say, when different tags reflect the carrier frequency and modulate their own information to the subcarrier frequency, from the frequency point of view, the modulated information can exist in the form of the subcarrier frequency near the carrier frequency of the reader, and the modulation frequency of the subcarrier is the coding rate of the tag. Wherein, the larger M is, the larger the coding rate is, and the larger the subcarrier frequency is. It can be understood that the description of the third message in this embodiment of the present application is also applicable to the identification information, and will not be described in detail here. It can be understood that, for descriptions about the respective time units of the first tag, the second tag, and the third tag, reference may be made to the above, and no further details are given here.
以下基于仿真结果说明不同的编码方式所对应的中心频率。基于伪随机序列对其进行FM0编码或Miller副载波调制,其比特率为80kbps。则根据仿真结果可以得到,四种编码方式的比特率均为80kbps。同时,从频谱仿真结果中可以得到:The center frequencies corresponding to different encoding methods are described below based on simulation results. Based on the pseudo-random sequence, it is FM0 coded or Miller subcarrier modulated, and its bit rate is 80kbps. According to the simulation results, it can be obtained that the bit rates of the four encoding methods are all 80 kbps. At the same time, it can be obtained from the spectrum simulation results:
当M=1时,副载波的中心频率为80kHz,占用带宽为160kHz;When M=1, the center frequency of the subcarrier is 80kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 160kHz;
当M=2时,副载波的中心频率在160kHz,占用带宽为320kHz;When M=2, the center frequency of the subcarrier is 160kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 320kHz;
当M=4时,副载波的中心频率320kHz,占用带宽为320kHz;When M=4, the center frequency of the subcarrier is 320kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 320kHz;
当M=8时,副载波的中心频率为640kHz,占用带宽为320kHz。When M=8, the center frequency of the subcarrier is 640kHz, and the occupied bandwidth is 320kHz.
也就是说,不同的M值,副载波的中心频率不同。由此,当不同M值的标签返回信号发生碰撞时,根据其频率特性,阅读器可以分别进行数字滤波,从而把不同标签的信号还原出来,进而起到碰撞信号分离的作用。由此,可以实现同一个时间单元中多用户接入的目的。也就是说,如果不同的标签在上行时采用了不同的编码,则可以使得多标签在频率上分离,从而使阅读器可以同时收到并解码出不同频率的信息。示例性的,在第二通信装置发送第三消息和/或标识信息时,其可以用高速Miller编码调制低信息符号速率的方波,Miller编码的阶数或类型为M。根据不同M值的标签返回信号发生碰撞时不同的频率特性,阅读器可以分别对不同的标签进行滤波,从而把不同标签的信号还原出来。由此,可到达撞信号分离的作用,从而实现在无线射频识别系统中多用户接入的目的。需要说明的是,当编码方式不同时,则表示米勒编码的阶数M不同。That is to say, for different M values, the center frequencies of the subcarriers are different. Therefore, when the return signals of tags with different M values collide, according to their frequency characteristics, the reader can perform digital filtering respectively, so as to restore the signals of different tags, and then play the role of separating the collision signals. In this way, the purpose of multi-user access in the same time unit can be achieved. That is to say, if different tags adopt different codes in the uplink, multiple tags can be separated in frequency, so that the reader can receive and decode information of different frequencies at the same time. Exemplarily, when the second communication device sends the third message and/or identification information, it may modulate a square wave with a low information symbol rate by using high-speed Miller coding, where the order or type of Miller coding is M. According to the different frequency characteristics when the return signals of tags with different M values collide, the reader can filter different tags separately, thereby restoring the signals of different tags. In this way, the effect of collision signal separation can be achieved, thereby achieving the purpose of multi-user access in the radio frequency identification system. It should be noted that when the encoding methods are different, it means that the order M of the Miller encoding is different.
以下详细说明图3所示的指示信息和第一编码方式的确定方法。关于图3所示的指示信息可以有如下几种实现方式:The indication information shown in FIG. 3 and the method for determining the first encoding mode will be described in detail below. The indication information shown in Figure 3 can be implemented in the following ways:
实现方式一、Implementation method one,
指示信息用于指示第二通信装置随机确定编码方式。也就是说,第一编码方式可以由第二通信装置随机确定;或者,第一编码方式可以由第二通信装置自主确定。也就是说,图3所示的方法中,第二通信装置发送第三消息和/或标识信息时所使用的第一编码方式是由其随机确定的。例如,标签可以根据第一消息中的指示信息确定其可以随机确定编码方式,无需参考第二消息中的M的取值确定编码方式。The indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to randomly determine the encoding mode. That is to say, the first encoding manner may be randomly determined by the second communication device; or, the first encoding manner may be determined autonomously by the second communication device. That is to say, in the method shown in FIG. 3 , the first coding manner used by the second communication device when sending the third message and/or identification information is randomly determined by it. For example, the tag may determine, according to the indication information in the first message, that it can randomly determine the encoding mode without referring to the value of M in the second message to determine the encoding mode.
该实现方式中,标签可以自己确定编码方式,无需参考第二消息中M的取值确定编码方式,由此,在同一个时间单元中的标签(如两个标签、三个标签或四个标签等)有可能确定的编码方式是不同的。该种实现方式,相对于图2b所示的方法,不仅改动减小,尽可能与图2b所示的方法兼容,而且实现简单。In this implementation, the tag can determine the encoding method by itself without referring to the value of M in the second message to determine the encoding method. Therefore, tags (such as two tags, three tags, or four tags, etc.) in the same time unit may determine different encoding methods. Compared with the method shown in FIG. 2b , this implementation mode not only requires less changes, but is as compatible as possible with the method shown in FIG. 2b , and is also simple to implement.
实现方式二、Implementation method two,
指示信息用于指示基于第一序列确定编码方式。也就是说,第一编码方式基于第一序列确定;或者,第二通信装置基于第一序列确定第一编码方式。The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the first sequence. That is to say, the first encoding manner is determined based on the first sequence; or, the second communication device determines the first encoding manner based on the first sequence.
结合图3所示的方法,第一序列为第二通信装置需要上报给第一通信装置的序列。关于第一序列的具体说明可以参考上文如图3所示的方法,这里不再一一详述。With reference to the method shown in FIG. 3 , the first sequence is the sequence that the second communication device needs to report to the first communication device. For a specific description of the first sequence, reference may be made to the above method shown in FIG. 3 , which will not be described in detail here.
示例性的,第二通信装置可以基于第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定编码方式。也就是说,第一编码方式可以基于第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定。其中,m不等于n,m和n均小于或等于第一序列的长度,m和n均为正整数。也就是说,第二通信装置可以基于第一序列中的某两个比特确定编码方式。Exemplarily, the second communication device may determine the coding mode based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence. That is to say, the first coding manner may be determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence. Wherein, m is not equal to n, both m and n are less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and both m and n are positive integers. That is to say, the second communication device may determine the coding mode based on certain two bits in the first sequence.
例如,第m个比特与第n个比特可以是连续的两个比特(如n=m+1)。又例如,第m个比特与第n个比特可以是第一序列中的第一个比特和最后一个比特。又例如,第m个比特与第n个比特是第一序列中处于中间位置的两个比特。以第一序列的比特长度为16个比特为例,则处于中间位置的两个比特可以是第8个比特和第9个比特。以第一序列的比特长度为15个比特为例,则处于中间位置的两个比特可以是第7个比特和第8个比特,也可以是第8个比特和第9个比特,本申请实施例对此不作限定。For example, the mth bit and the nth bit may be two consecutive bits (such as n=m+1). For another example, the mth bit and the nth bit may be the first bit and the last bit in the first sequence. For another example, the mth bit and the nth bit are two middle bits in the first sequence. Taking the bit length of the first sequence as 16 bits as an example, the two middle bits may be the 8th bit and the 9th bit. Taking the bit length of the first sequence as 15 bits as an example, the two bits in the middle position may be the 7th bit and the 8th bit, or may be the 8th bit and the 9th bit, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
该种实现方式中,第m个比特与第n个比特的两个比特的取值与编码方式对应。例如,这两个比特的取值为00,则对应的编码方式可以为FM0。又例如,这两个比特的取值为01,则对应的编码方式可以为miller-2。又例如,这两个比特的取值为10,则对应的编码方式可以为miller-4。又例如,这两个比特的取值为11,则对应的编码方式可以为miller-8。可理解,这里所示的第m个比特和第n个比特的取值与编码方式之间的对应关系仅为示例,不应将其理解为对本申请实施例的限定。示例性的,对于不同的第二通信装置来说,第m个比特和第n个比特的取值可以是相同的。该实现方式中,标签基于其自身的RN16确定编码方式,可以尽可能地降低同一个时间单元中不同标签的碰撞概率,提高时域资源的利用率。In this implementation manner, the values of the two bits of the mth bit and the nth bit correspond to the encoding manner. For example, the value of these two bits is 00, and the corresponding coding mode may be FM0. For another example, if the value of these two bits is 01, the corresponding encoding method may be miller-2. For another example, if the value of these two bits is 10, the corresponding encoding method may be miller-4. For another example, if the value of these two bits is 11, the corresponding encoding method may be miller-8. It can be understood that the correspondence between the values of the mth bit and the nth bit and the encoding mode shown here is only an example, and should not be construed as a limitation to this embodiment of the present application. Exemplarily, for different second communication apparatuses, values of the mth bit and the nth bit may be the same. In this implementation, the tag determines the encoding method based on its own RN16, which can reduce the collision probability of different tags in the same time unit as much as possible, and improve the utilization rate of time domain resources.
实现方式三、Implementation method three,
指示信息用于指示基于接收信号能量强度确定编码方式。也就是说,第一编码方式基于第二通信装置接收第二消息的接收信号能量强度确定;或者,第二通信装置可以基于其接收到的信号的能量强度确定第一编码方式。可理解,本申请实施例所示的接收信号能量强度还可以理解为标签所接收到的阅读器的载波能量强度。The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the energy strength of the received signal. That is to say, the first encoding method is determined based on the received signal energy strength of the second message received by the second communication device; or, the second communication device may determine the first encoding method based on the energy strength of the signal it receives. It can be understood that the received signal energy strength shown in the embodiment of the present application can also be understood as the carrier energy strength of the reader received by the tag.
示例性的,第二通信装置可以基于第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式。例如,第一编码方式可以是基于第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定的。Exemplarily, the second communication device may determine the coding mode based on a comparison result of the received signal energy strength of the second message with a preset threshold. For example, the first coding manner may be determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold.
可选的,在第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,第一编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式。可选的,在第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,第一编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式。可选的,在第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,第一编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式。可选的,在第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,第一编码方式包括FM0。第一阈值大于第二阈值,第二阈值大于第三阈值。Optionally, in a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the first encoding manner includes M=8 Miller encoding manner. Optionally, in a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold, the first encoding manner includes a Miller encoding manner of M=4. Optionally, in a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the second threshold and greater than or equal to the third threshold, the first encoding manner includes a Miller encoding manner of M=2. Optionally, when the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the third threshold, the first encoding manner includes FMO. The first threshold is greater than the second threshold, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold.
示例性的,标签可以根据其接收到的第二消息的能量强度(如用P
rx表示)选择编码方式。同时,阅读器设置三个能量强度门限如P
1、P
2和P
3,且P
1>P
2>P
3。当P
rx≥P
1时,对应的编码方式可以为miller-8。当P
1>P
rx≥P
2时,对应的编码方式可以为miller-4。当P
2>P
rx≥P
3时,对应的编码方式可以为miller-2。当P
3>P
rx时,对应的编码方式可以为FM0。
Exemplarily, the tag may select an encoding mode according to the energy intensity (such as represented by P rx ) of the second message it receives. Meanwhile, the reader sets three energy intensity thresholds such as P 1 , P 2 and P 3 , and P 1 >P 2 >P 3 . When P rx ≥ P 1 , the corresponding encoding method may be miller-8. When P 1 >P rx ≥P 2 , the corresponding encoding method may be miller-4. When P 2 >P rx ≥P 3 , the corresponding encoding method may be miller-2. When P 3 >P rx , the corresponding coding mode may be FM0.
Miller-8、miller-4、miller-2和FM0这四种编码方式中miller-8的副载波频率最大,功耗相对较大,按功耗排序依次是miller-8>miller-4>miller-2>FM0。由此,M的取值越大,需要标签接收更多的能量以发送上行消息。因此,通过以上所示的能量强度与阈值之间的关系,可使得第二通信装置能够结合自身所需的能量发送第三消息和标识信息。Among the four coding methods of Miller-8, miller-4, miller-2 and FM0, miller-8 has the highest subcarrier frequency and relatively high power consumption. The order of power consumption is miller-8>miller-4>miller-2>FM0. Therefore, the larger the value of M is, the more energy the tag needs to receive to send an uplink message. Therefore, through the relationship between the energy intensity and the threshold shown above, the second communication device can send the third message and the identification information in combination with the energy required by itself.
该种实现方式中,阅读器不需要明确指示编码方式,标签就基于其自身接收到的信号的能量强度确定编码方式。相对于图2b所示的方法,改动小,而且达到多标签频分复用的效果,提高了时域资源的利用率。In this implementation manner, the reader does not need to explicitly indicate the encoding manner, and the tag determines the encoding manner based on the energy intensity of the signal it receives. Compared with the method shown in Fig. 2b, the modification is small, and the effect of multi-label frequency division multiplexing is achieved, and the utilization rate of time domain resources is improved.
实现方式四、Implementation method four,
指示信息用于指示基于第二序列或参考序列中的至少一项确定编码方式。例如,指示信 息用于指示基于第二序列确定编码方式。又例如,指示信息用于指示基于参考序列确定编码方式。又例如,指示信息用于指示基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果确定编码方式。也就是说,第一编码方式可以是第二通信装置基于第二序列确定的;或者,第一编码方式可以是基于第二序列与参考序列的比较结果确定的;或者,第一编码方式是基于参考序列确定的。也就是说,第二通信装置基于第二序列和/或参考序列确定第一编码方式。The indication information is used to indicate to determine the encoding mode based on at least one of the second sequence or the reference sequence. For example, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the second sequence. For another example, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding manner is determined based on the reference sequence. For another example, the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding mode is determined based on the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence. That is to say, the first coding method may be determined by the second communication device based on the second sequence; or, the first coding method may be determined based on a comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence; or, the first coding method may be determined based on the reference sequence. That is to say, the second communication device determines the first encoding manner based on the second sequence and/or the reference sequence.
结合图3所示的方法,第二序列可以包含于第一消息中,参考序列可以基于起始位置信息、长度信息和内存内容确定。关于第二序列与参考序列的说明可以参考图3所示的步骤301,这里不再一一详述。In combination with the method shown in FIG. 3 , the second sequence may be included in the first message, and the reference sequence may be determined based on starting position information, length information, and memory content. For the description of the second sequence and the reference sequence, reference may be made to step 301 shown in FIG. 3 , which will not be described in detail here.
可选的,第一编码方式基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定,i不等于j,i和j均小于或等于第二序列的长度,均为正整数。可选的,第一编码方式基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定,p不等于q,p和q均小于或等于参考序列的长度,均为正整数。第一编码方式基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定,x不等于y,x和y均小于或等于比较结果的长度,均为正整数。Optionally, the first encoding method is determined based on the i-th bit and the j-th bit in the second sequence, i is not equal to j, i and j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and both are positive integers. Optionally, the first encoding method is determined based on the p-th bit and the q-th bit in the reference sequence, p is not equal to q, both p and q are less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and both are positive integers. The first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, x is not equal to y, and both x and y are less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and both are positive integers.
可理解,关于第i个比特和第j个比特的说明,第p个比特和第q个比特的说明,以及第x个比特和第y个比特的说明可以参考上文所示的第m个比特和第n个比特的说明,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, for the description of the i-th bit and the j-th bit, the description of the p-th bit and the q-th bit, and the description of the x-th bit and the y-th bit, reference can be made to the description of the m-th bit and the n-th bit shown above, which will not be described in detail here.
需要说明的是,以上所示的组合m和n、i和j、p和q、x和y的取值是否相同,本申请实施例不作限定。例如,m可以等于i,n可以等于j,或者,m可以等于j等,这里不再一一列举。可理解,以上所示的m和n、i和j、p和q、x和y是以包括四种编码方式为例示出的,如两个比特能够确定出四种状态,该四种状态可以与四种编码方式相对应。然而,当标签可以使用的编码方式更多时,标签还可以基于更多比特确定编码方式。示例性的,当标签可以使用的编码方式的种类大于4,且小于或等于8时,标签可以基于其获取到的序列中的三个比特确定编码方式。例如,标签可以基于第一序列中的三个比特确定编码方式;或者,基于第二序列中的三个比特确定编码方式;或者,基于参考序列中的三个比特确定编码方式;或者,基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的三个比特确定编码方式等,这里不再一一列举。通过与编码方式相对应的比特数确定编码方式,实现简单,而且标签还能够以更贴近编码方式的种类的方式快速地确定编码方式。It should be noted that the embodiments of the present application do not limit whether the values of the combinations m and n, i and j, p and q, and x and y shown above are the same. For example, m can be equal to i, n can be equal to j, or m can be equal to j, etc., which will not be listed here. It can be understood that the above mentioned m and n, i and j, p and q, x and y are examples including four coding modes, for example, two bits can determine four states, and the four states can correspond to the four coding modes. However, when the tag can use more coding methods, the tag can also determine the coding method based on more bits. Exemplarily, when the types of encoding modes that the tag can use are greater than 4 and less than or equal to 8, the tag can determine the encoding mode based on the three bits in the acquired sequence. For example, the tag can determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the first sequence; or, determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the second sequence; or determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the reference sequence; or determine the encoding method based on the three bits in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, etc., which will not be listed here. The coding method is determined by the number of bits corresponding to the coding method, which is simple to implement, and the tag can quickly determine the coding method in a manner closer to the type of the coding method.
本申请实施例中,当阅读器下发第一消息时,该第一消息会包括第二序列。同时,标签还需要根据第一消息确定参考序列,因此通过基于第二序列或参考序列或第二序列与参考序列的比较结果确定编码方式,不仅对第一消息的改进小,而且还可使得标签能够确定编码方式。In the embodiment of the present application, when the reader sends the first message, the first message will include the second sequence. At the same time, the tag also needs to determine the reference sequence according to the first message. Therefore, by determining the encoding method based on the second sequence or the reference sequence or the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, not only the improvement of the first message is small, but also enables the tag to determine the encoding method.
示例性的,以上所示的指示信息所指示的具体内容可以由第一通信装置设置,或者,也可以由标准定义等。例如,第一通信装置可以通过第二消息中的M的取值向第二通信装置指示第一消息中的指示信息的具体内容。针对图2b所示的方法中,第一通信装置所指示的M对所有的第二通信装置是相同的。然而,本申请实施例中,M的取值与指示信息所指示的内容对应。即M的四种取值,如00、01、10、11可以与上述四种实现方式对应。例如,M的取值为00时,指示信息用于指示第二通信装置可以随机确定编码方式。又例如,M的取值为01时,指示信息用于指示第二通信装置可以基于第一序列确定编码方式。又例如,M的取值为10时,指示信息用于指示第二通信装置基于其接收到的第二消息的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式。又例如,M的取值为11时,指示信息用于指示第二通信装置基于第二序列确定编码方式。又例如,M的取值为11时,指示信息用于指示第二通信装置基于第二序列和参考序 列的比较结果确定编码方式。又例如,M的取值为11时,指示信息用于指示第二通信装置基于参考序列确定编码方式。可理解,以上所示的M的取值与指示信息所指示的具体内容之间的对应关系仅为示例,不应将其理解为对本申请实施例的限定。Exemplarily, the specific content indicated by the indication information shown above may be set by the first communication device, or may also be defined by a standard. For example, the first communication device may indicate to the second communication device the specific content of the indication information in the first message through the value of M in the second message. For the method shown in FIG. 2b, M indicated by the first communication device is the same for all second communication devices. However, in the embodiment of the present application, the value of M corresponds to the content indicated by the indication information. That is, the four values of M, such as 00, 01, 10, and 11, may correspond to the above four implementation manners. For example, when the value of M is 00, the indication information is used to indicate that the second communication device can randomly determine the encoding mode. For another example, when the value of M is 01, the indication information is used to indicate that the second communication device can determine the encoding manner based on the first sequence. For another example, when the value of M is 10, the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to determine the encoding mode based on the received signal energy strength of the second message it receives. For another example, when the value of M is 11, the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to determine the encoding manner based on the second sequence. For another example, when the value of M is 11, the indication information is used to instruct the second communication device to determine the encoding mode based on the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence. For another example, when the value of M is 11, the indication information is used to instruct the second communication apparatus to determine a coding scheme based on the reference sequence. It can be understood that the above-mentioned correspondence between the value of M and the specific content indicated by the indication information is only an example, and should not be construed as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的另一种通信方法的交互示意图。图5所示的方法中,关于select的说明可以参考图3所示的第一消息,或者,适应性地参考图2b关于表1的描述。关于query的说明可以参考图3所示的第二消息,或者,适应性地参考图2b关于表2a和/或表2b的描述。关于RN16(f1)、RN16(f2)、RN16(f3)的说明可以参考图3所示的第三消息,或者,参考图2b关于表3的描述。可理解,这里所示的f1、f2、f3用于表示发送RN16时所采用的编码方式的不同。例如,RN16(f1)可以表示第一标签调制发副载波频率为f1,该第一标签通过副载波频率f1和载波频率f0发送包括RN16的消息。其他类似,这里不再一一说明。New ACK的说明可以参考图3所示的ACK消息,或者,适应性参考图2b关于表4的描述。Queryreq的说明可以参考图2b的描述,EPC(f1)至EPC(f4)的说明可以参考图3所示的标识信息,或者,参考图2b关于表5的描述。Fig. 5 is an interactive schematic diagram of another communication method provided by the embodiment of the present application. In the method shown in FIG. 5 , for the description about select, refer to the first message shown in FIG. 3 , or refer to the description about Table 1 in FIG. 2 b adaptively. For the description about the query, refer to the second message shown in FIG. 3 , or, adaptively refer to the description about Table 2a and/or Table 2b in FIG. 2b. For descriptions of RN16(f1), RN16(f2), and RN16(f3), reference may be made to the third message shown in FIG. 3 , or, reference may be made to the description of Table 3 in FIG. 2b. It can be understood that the f1, f2, and f3 shown here are used to represent the differences in the encoding methods used when sending the RN16. For example, RN16(f1) may indicate that the first tag modulates the sending subcarrier frequency to f1, and the first tag sends a message including RN16 through the subcarrier frequency f1 and the carrier frequency f0. Others are similar and will not be explained here. For the description of New ACK, refer to the ACK message shown in Figure 3, or refer to the description of Table 4 in Figure 2b for adaptation. For the description of Queryreq, refer to the description in FIG. 2b . For the descriptions of EPC(f1) to EPC(f4), refer to the identification information shown in FIG. 3 , or refer to the description about Table 5 in FIG. 2b.
如图5所示,阅读器可以通过广播发送select消息,该select消息可以用于选择具有固定特征的标签与阅读器轮询。例如,该select消息可以用于选择具有固定特征的标签进入盘点流程(如阅读器需要对标签进行盘点)。示例性的,通过该select消息,第一标签、第二标签和第三标签都属于固定特征的标签。可理解,关于如何通过select消息选择具有固定特征的标签的说明可以参考上文,这里不再一一详述。As shown in FIG. 5 , the reader can send a select message through broadcast, and the select message can be used to select a tag with fixed characteristics to poll with the reader. For example, the select message may be used to select tags with fixed characteristics to enter the inventory process (for example, the reader needs to inventory the tags). Exemplarily, through the select message, the first label, the second label and the third label all belong to labels with fixed characteristics. It can be understood that for the description of how to select a tag with a fixed feature through the select message, reference may be made to the above, and details will not be detailed here.
第一标签、第二标签和第三标签通过select消息中的目标字段中的取值确定其可以基于预设规则确定编码方式;或者,确定其可以采用不同编码并发进行接入;或者,确定其可以执行频分复用的并发接入流程。The first tag, the second tag, and the third tag are determined by the value in the target field in the select message to determine the encoding method based on preset rules; or determine that they can use different encodings for concurrent access; or determine that they can perform frequency division multiplexing concurrent access procedures.
阅读器通过广播发送query消息,每个标签根据该query消息随机选择时间单元。例如,第一标签和第二标签所选择的时间单元相同,且都处于该query消息所在的时间单元中。由此,该第一标签和第二标签可以基于预设规则确定编码方式,同时,第一标签和第二标签所确定的编码方式不同。第一标签基于副载波频率f1和载波频率f0向阅读器发送RN16,第二标签基于副载波频率f2和载波频率f0向阅读器发送RN16。The reader sends a query message through broadcast, and each tag randomly selects a time unit according to the query message. For example, the time units selected by the first label and the second label are the same, and both are in the time unit where the query message is located. Thus, the first label and the second label can determine the encoding method based on a preset rule, and at the same time, the encoding methods determined by the first label and the second label are different. The first tag sends RN16 to the reader based on subcarrier frequency f1 and carrier frequency f0, and the second tag sends RN16 to the reader based on subcarrier frequency f2 and carrier frequency f0.
阅读器向第一标签和第二标签发送new ACK,该new ACK用于同时确认第一标签的RN16和第二标签的RN16。由此,第一标签可以基于副载波频率f1和载波频率f0向阅读器发送EPC,第二标签基于副载波频率f2和载波频率f0向阅读器发送EPC。The reader sends a new ACK to the first tag and the second tag, and the new ACK is used to simultaneously confirm the RN16 of the first tag and the RN16 of the second tag. Thus, the first tag can send the EPC to the reader based on the subcarrier frequency f1 and the carrier frequency f0, and the second tag can send the EPC to the reader based on the subcarrier frequency f2 and the carrier frequency f0.
阅读器继续与其他标签进行轮询。例如,阅读器通过广播发送queryreq消息,第三标签基于副载波频率f3和载波频率f0向阅读器发送RN16,阅读器向第三标签发送new ACK。由于该queryreq消息所处的时间单元中只有一个标签,因此,该new ACK用于确认第三标签发送的RN16。The reader continues polling with other tags. For example, the reader sends a queryreq message by broadcast, the third tag sends RN16 to the reader based on the subcarrier frequency f3 and carrier frequency f0, and the reader sends new ACK to the third tag. Since there is only one label in the time unit of the queryreq message, the new ACK is used to confirm the RN16 sent by the third label.
可理解,本申请实施例对于select消息是否与query处于同一个时间单元不作限定。例如,select可以位于query消息所处的时间单元之前,也可能位于与该query所处的时间单元相同。It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application does not limit whether the select message is in the same time unit as the query. For example, select may be located before the time unit of the query message, or may be located at the same time unit as the query message.
可理解,关于图5所示的方法的其他说明可以参考前述各个实施例,这里不再一一详述。图5中省略号省略的是其他时间单元中阅读器与标签的轮询。It can be understood that, for other descriptions about the method shown in FIG. 5 , reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, and detailed descriptions are omitted here. The ellipsis in Figure 5 is the polling between the reader and the tag in other time units.
本申请实施例提供的方法,可以尽可能地使不同的标签选择不同的编码方式上传RN16和EPC,从而多标签使用了不同的频率资源(如副载波频率)。阅读器可以通过滤波等方式将并发的RN16(或EPC)正确解码,达到了多标签在同一时隙内并发接入的效果,提高了单 位时间内标签的接入数量,以及总体的标签接入效率。The method provided by the embodiment of this application can make different tags choose different coding methods to upload RN16 and EPC as far as possible, so that multiple tags use different frequency resources (such as subcarrier frequencies). The reader can correctly decode concurrent RN16 (or EPC) through filtering and other methods, achieving the effect of concurrent access of multiple tags in the same time slot, improving the number of tag access per unit time and the overall tag access efficiency.
需要说明的是,以上所示的各个实施例中,其中一个实施例未详细描述的实现方式可以参考其他实施例。例如,图3中所涉及的关于编码方式的说明可以参考图4a至图4c。又例如,图4a至图4c所示的基于RFID的通信方法的说明可以参考图3。又例如,图3所示的基于RFID的通信方法的说明可以参考图5。图5所示的各个消息的说明可以参考图3。又例如,图5所示的编码方式的说明可以参考图4a至图4c等,这里不再一一列举。It should be noted that, in the various embodiments shown above, for an implementation manner not described in detail in one embodiment, reference may be made to other embodiments. For example, the description about the encoding method involved in FIG. 3 may refer to FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c. For another example, reference may be made to FIG. 3 for the description of the RFID-based communication method shown in FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c. For another example, reference may be made to FIG. 5 for the description of the RFID-based communication method shown in FIG. 3 . The description of each message shown in FIG. 5 may refer to FIG. 3 . For another example, reference may be made to FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c for the description of the encoding manner shown in FIG. 5 , which will not be listed here.
以下将介绍本申请实施例提供的通信装置。The communication device provided by the embodiment of the present application will be introduced below.
本申请根据上述方法实施例对通信装置进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面将结合图6至图8详细描述本申请实施例的通信装置。The present application divides the communication device into functional modules according to the above method embodiments. For example, each functional module may be divided corresponding to each function, or two or more functions may be integrated into one processing module. The above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in this application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation. The communication device according to the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 .
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构示意图,如图6所示,该通信装置包括处理单元601、接收单元602和发送单元603。FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6 , the communication device includes a processing unit 601 , a receiving unit 602 and a sending unit 603 .
该通信装置可以是上文示出的标签或第二通信装置等。即该通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中由标签执行的步骤或功能等。The communication device may be the tag shown above or a second communication device or the like. That is, the communication device can be used to execute the steps or functions executed by the tag in the method embodiments above.
接收单元602,用于接收第一消息;a receiving unit 602, configured to receive a first message;
接收单元602,还用于接收第二消息;a receiving unit 602, further configured to receive a second message;
发送单元603,用于基于第一编码方式发送第三消息。A sending unit 603, configured to send the third message based on the first encoding manner.
可理解,关于第一消息、第二消息、第三消息、第一编码方式的说明可以参考上文,这里不再一一详述。It can be understood that, for descriptions about the first message, the second message, the third message, and the first encoding manner, reference may be made to the above, and details will not be detailed here.
可理解,上述处理单元601,用于根据获取到的第一消息和第二消息确定第三消息,以及通过发送单元603基于第一编码方式发送第三消息。关于处理单元601与接收单元602、发送单元603之间的关系,本申请实施例不作限定。It can be understood that the processing unit 601 is configured to determine the third message according to the acquired first message and the second message, and send the third message based on the first encoding manner through the sending unit 603 . Regarding the relationship between the processing unit 601, the receiving unit 602, and the sending unit 603, this embodiment of the present application makes no limitation.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接收单元602,还用于接收ACK消息;发送单元603,还用于基于第一编码方式发送标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the receiving unit 602 is further configured to receive the ACK message; the sending unit 603 is further configured to send the identification information based on the first coding manner.
可理解,本申请实施例示出的发送单元、接收单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例,对于发送单元、接收单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等,可以参考上述方法实施例,这里不再详述。例如,接收单元602还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤301和步骤302所示的接收步骤。发送单元603还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤303中的发送步骤。又例如,接收单元602还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤304中的接收步骤,以及发送单元603还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤305中的发送步骤。又例如,处理单元601,还可以用于执行如图4a至图4c所示的编码方式。可理解,对处理单元601、接收单元602和发送单元603的说明,这里不再一一列举。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the sending unit, receiving unit, and processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the sending unit, receiving unit, and processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments, which will not be described in detail here. For example, the receiving unit 602 may also be configured to perform the receiving steps shown in step 301 and step 302 shown in FIG. 3 . The sending unit 603 may also be configured to execute the sending step in step 303 shown in FIG. 3 . For another example, the receiving unit 602 may also be used to perform the receiving step in step 304 shown in FIG. 3 , and the sending unit 603 may also be used to perform the sending step in step 305 shown in FIG. 3 . For another example, the processing unit 601 may also be configured to execute the encoding manners shown in FIG. 4a to FIG. 4c. It can be understood that descriptions of the processing unit 601, the receiving unit 602, and the sending unit 603 are not listed here one by one.
复用图6,上述通信装置可以是上文示出的阅读器或第一通信装置等。即该通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中由阅读器执行的步骤或功能等。Reusing FIG. 6 , the above-mentioned communication device may be the reader or the first communication device shown above, or the like. That is, the communication device can be used to execute the steps or functions executed by the reader in the above method embodiments.
发送单元603,用于发送第一消息;a sending unit 603, configured to send the first message;
发送单元603,还用于发送第二消息;a sending unit 603, further configured to send a second message;
接收单元602,用于接收第三消息。The receiving unit 602 is configured to receive the third message.
示例性的,处理单元601,可以用于获取第一消息,以及获取第二消息。可选的,处理单元601,还可以用于对获取到的第三消息进行处理,如得到ACK消息等。Exemplarily, the processing unit 601 may be configured to acquire the first message and acquire the second message. Optionally, the processing unit 601 may also be configured to process the acquired third message, such as obtaining an ACK message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,发送单元603,还用于发送ACK消息;接收单元602,还用于接收标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the sending unit 603 is further configured to send an ACK message; the receiving unit 602 is further configured to receive identification information.
本申请各个实施例中,关于第一消息、第二消息、第三消息、第一编码方式、指示信息、第一序列、第二序列、参考序列等的说明还可以参考上文方法实施例中的介绍,这里不再一一详述。In each embodiment of the present application, for descriptions of the first message, the second message, the third message, the first encoding method, indication information, the first sequence, the second sequence, and the reference sequence, etc., reference may also be made to the introduction in the method embodiments above, and details will not be detailed here.
可理解,本申请实施例示出的发送单元、接收单元和处理单元的具体说明仅为示例,对于发送单元、接收单元和处理单元的具体功能或执行的步骤等,可以参考上述方法实施例,这里不再详述。例如,发送单元603还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤301和步骤302所示的发送步骤。接收单元602还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤303中的接收步骤。又例如,发送单元603还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤304中的发送步骤,以及接收单元602还可以用于执行图3所示的步骤305中的接收步骤。可理解,对处理单元601、接收单元602和发送单元603的说明,这里不再一一列举。It can be understood that the specific descriptions of the sending unit, receiving unit, and processing unit shown in the embodiments of the present application are only examples. For the specific functions or steps performed by the sending unit, receiving unit, and processing unit, reference can be made to the above method embodiments, which will not be described in detail here. For example, the sending unit 603 may also be configured to execute the sending steps shown in step 301 and step 302 shown in FIG. 3 . The receiving unit 602 may also be configured to perform the receiving step in step 303 shown in FIG. 3 . For another example, the sending unit 603 may also be configured to execute the sending step in step 304 shown in FIG. 3 , and the receiving unit 602 may also be configured to execute the receiving step in step 305 shown in FIG. 3 . It can be understood that descriptions of the processing unit 601, the receiving unit 602, and the sending unit 603 are not listed here one by one.
以上介绍了本申请实施例的标签和阅读器,以下介绍所述标签和阅读器可能的产品形态。应理解,但凡具备上述图6所述的标签的功能的任何形态的产品,或者,但凡具备上述图6所述的阅读器的功能的任何形态的产品,都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。还应理解,以下介绍仅为举例,不限制本申请实施例的标签和阅读器的产品形态仅限于此。The tags and readers of the embodiments of the present application are described above, and possible product forms of the tags and readers are introduced below. It should be understood that any form of product having the function of the tag described above in FIG. 6 , or any form of product having the function of the reader described above in FIG. 6 falls within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application. It should also be understood that the following introduction is only an example, and the product form of the tag and the reader in the embodiment of the present application is not limited thereto.
示例性的,处理单元601可以是一个或多个处理器,发送单元603可以是发送器,接收单元602可以是接收器,或者发送单元603和接收单元602集成于一个器件,例如收发器。或者,处理单元601可以是一个或多个处理器(或者处理单元601可以是一个或多个逻辑电路),发送单元603可以是输出接口,接收单元602可以是输入接口,或者发送单元603和接收单元602集成于一个单元,例如输入输出接口。以下将详细说明。Exemplarily, the processing unit 601 may be one or more processors, the sending unit 603 may be a transmitter, and the receiving unit 602 may be a receiver, or the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into one device, such as a transceiver. Alternatively, the processing unit 601 may be one or more processors (or the processing unit 601 may be one or more logic circuits), the sending unit 603 may be an output interface, and the receiving unit 602 may be an input interface, or the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input and output interface. Details will be given below.
在一种可能的实现方式中,图6所示的通信装置中,处理单元601可以是一个或多个处理器,发送单元603和接收单元602可以集成于收发器。本申请实施例中,处理器和收发器可以被耦合等,对于处理器和收发器的连接方式,本申请实施例不作限定。In a possible implementation manner, in the communication device shown in FIG. 6 , the processing unit 601 may be one or more processors, and the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into a transceiver. In the embodiment of the present application, the processor and the transceiver may be coupled, and the connection manner of the processor and the transceiver is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
如图7所示,该通信装置70包括一个或多个处理器720和收发器710。As shown in FIG. 7 , the communication device 70 includes one or more processors 720 and a transceiver 710 .
示例性的,当该通信装置用于执行上述标签执行的步骤或方法或功能时,收发器710,用于接收第一消息以及第二消息;收发器710,还用于发送第三消息。示例性的,收发器710,可以通过处理器720基于第一编码方式发送第三消息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the steps or methods or functions performed by the above tag, the transceiver 710 is used to receive the first message and the second message; the transceiver 710 is also used to send the third message. Exemplarily, the transceiver 710 may use the processor 720 to send the third message based on the first coding manner.
当该通信装置70用于执行上述标签执行的步骤或方法或功能时,可选的,当标签为无源设备或半有源设备时,处理器720可以是基带处理器;可选的,当标签为有源设备时,处理器720可以包括基带处理器和射频处理器。这里所示的处理器720仅为示例,不应将其理解为对本申请实施例的限定。When the communication device 70 is used to execute the above steps or methods or functions performed by the tag, optionally, when the tag is a passive device or a semi-active device, the processor 720 may be a baseband processor; optionally, when the tag is an active device, the processor 720 may include a baseband processor and a radio frequency processor. The processor 720 shown here is only an example, and should not be construed as limiting the embodiment of the present application.
示例性的,当该通信装置用于执行上述阅读器执行的步骤或方法或功能时,收发器710,用于发送第一消息以及第二消息;该收发器710,还用于接收第三消息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the steps or methods or functions performed by the above reader, the transceiver 710 is used to send the first message and the second message; the transceiver 710 is also used to receive the third message.
示例性的,处理器720,可以用于获取第一消息和第二消息等。Exemplarily, the processor 720 may be configured to acquire the first message, the second message, and so on.
可理解,对于处理器和收发器的具体说明还可以参考图6所示的处理单元、发送单元和接收单元的介绍,这里不再赘述。It can be understood that for the specific description of the processor and the transceiver, reference may also be made to the introduction of the processing unit, the sending unit, and the receiving unit shown in FIG. 6 , which will not be repeated here.
本申请各个实施例中,关于第一消息、第二消息、第三消息、第一编码方式、指示信息、第一序列、第二序列、参考序列等的说明还可以参考上文方法实施例中的介绍,这里不再一一详述。In each embodiment of the present application, for descriptions of the first message, the second message, the third message, the first encoding method, indication information, the first sequence, the second sequence, and the reference sequence, etc., reference may also be made to the introduction in the method embodiments above, and details will not be detailed here.
在图7所示的通信装置的各个实现方式中,收发器可以包括接收机和发射机,该接收机用于执行接收的功能(或操作),该发射机用于执行发射的功能(或操作)。以及收发器用于通过传输介质和其他设备/装置进行通信。In various implementations of the communication device shown in FIG. 7 , the transceiver may include a receiver and a transmitter, the receiver is used to perform a function (or operation) of reception, and the transmitter is used to perform a function (or operation) of transmission. And the transceiver is used to communicate with other devices/devices through the transmission medium.
可选的,通信装置70还可以包括一个或多个存储器730,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。存储器730和处理器720耦合。本申请实施例中的耦合是装置、单元或模块之间的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式,用于装置、单元或模块之间的信息交互。处理器720可能和存储器730协同操作。处理器720可以执行存储器730中存储的程序指令。Optionally, the communication device 70 may further include one or more memories 730 for storing program instructions and/or data. The memory 730 is coupled to the processor 720 . The coupling in the embodiments of the present application is an indirect coupling or a communication connection between devices, units or modules, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms, and is used for information exchange between devices, units or modules. Processor 720 may cooperate with memory 730 . Processor 720 may execute program instructions stored in memory 730 .
本申请实施例中不限定上述收发器710、处理器720以及存储器730之间的具体连接介质。本申请实施例在图7中以存储器730、处理器720以及收发器710之间通过总线740连接,总线在图7中以粗线表示,其它部件之间的连接方式,仅是进行示意性说明,并不引以为限。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示,图7中仅用一条粗线表示,但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。In this embodiment of the present application, a specific connection medium among the transceiver 710, the processor 720, and the memory 730 is not limited. In the embodiment of the present application, in FIG. 7, the memory 730, the processor 720, and the transceiver 710 are connected through a bus 740. The bus is represented by a thick line in FIG. The bus can be divided into address bus, data bus, control bus and so on. For ease of representation, only one thick line is used in FIG. 7 , but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
在本申请实施例中,处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器、专用集成电路、现场可编程门阵列或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等,可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者任何常规的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成等。In the embodiment of the present application, the processor may be a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor, an application-specific integrated circuit, a field programmable gate array or other programmable logic device, a discrete gate or transistor logic device, a discrete hardware component, etc., and may realize or execute the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application. A general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or any conventional processor or the like. The steps of the methods disclosed in connection with the embodiments of the present application may be directly implemented by a hardware processor, or implemented by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
本申请实施例中,存储器可包括但不限于硬盘(hard disk drive,HDD)或固态硬盘(solid-state drive,SSD)等非易失性存储器,随机存储记忆体(Random Access Memory,RAM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM,EPROM)、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)或便携式只读存储器(Compact Disc Read-Only Memory,CD-ROM)等等。存储器是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的程序代码,并能够由计算机(如本申请示出的通信装置等)读和/或写的任何存储介质,但不限于此。本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是电路或者其它任意能够实现存储功能的装置,用于存储程序指令和/或数据。In the embodiment of the present application, the memory may include but not limited to hard disk drive (hard disk drive, HDD) or non-volatile memory such as solid-state drive (solid-state drive, SSD), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable Programmable ROM, EPROM), read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM) or portable read-only memory (Compact Disc Read-Only Memory, CD-ROM) and so on. The memory is any storage medium that can be used to carry or store program codes in the form of instructions or data structures, and can be read and/or written by a computer (such as the communication device shown in this application, etc.), but is not limited thereto. The memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be a circuit or any other device capable of implementing a storage function, and is used for storing program instructions and/or data.
处理器720主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,以及对整个通信装置进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。存储器730主要用于存储软件程序和数据。收发器710可以包括控制电路和天线,控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置,例如触摸屏、显示屏,键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。The processor 720 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs. The memory 730 is mainly used to store software programs and data. The transceiver 710 may include a control circuit and an antenna, and the control circuit is mainly used for converting a baseband signal to a radio frequency signal and processing the radio frequency signal. Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves. Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
示例性的,当通信装置开机后,处理器720可以读取存储器730中的软件程序,解释并执行软件程序的指令,处理软件程序的数据。示例性的,对于有源设备来说,当需要通过无线发送数据时,处理器720对待发送的数据进行基带处理后,输出基带信号至射频电路,射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到通信装置时,射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号,将射频信号转换为基带信号,并将基带信号输出至处理器720,处理器720将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。示例性的,对于无源设备或半有源设备来说,由于可以不包括射频处理器,因此输入的射频信号可以通过基带处理器进行处理,或者,基带处理器处理得到的信号通过射频的方式输出。Exemplarily, when the communication device is turned on, the processor 720 can read the software program in the memory 730, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program. Exemplarily, for an active device, when data needs to be transmitted wirelessly, the processor 720 performs baseband processing on the data to be transmitted, and then outputs the baseband signal to a radio frequency circuit, and the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal, and then transmits the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves. When data is sent to the communication device, the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 720, and the processor 720 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data. Exemplarily, for a passive device or a semi-active device, since the radio frequency processor may not be included, the input radio frequency signal may be processed by the baseband processor, or the signal processed by the baseband processor may be output by radio frequency.
在另一种实现中,所述的射频电路和天线可以独立于进行基带处理的处理器而设置,例如在分布式场景中,射频电路和天线可以与独立于通信装置,呈拉远式的布置。In another implementation, the radio frequency circuit and antenna may be arranged independently of the processor performing baseband processing. For example, in a distributed scenario, the radio frequency circuit and antenna may be arranged remotely from the communication device.
可理解,本申请实施例对于标签或阅读器的工作方式仅为示例,不应将其理解为对本申请实施例的限定。可理解,本申请实施例示出的通信装置还可以具有比图7更多的元器件等, 本申请实施例对此不作限定。以上所示的处理器和收发器所执行的方法仅为示例,对于该处理器和收发器具体所执行的步骤可参照上文介绍的方法。It can be understood that the working mode of the tag or the reader in the embodiment of the present application is only an example, which should not be interpreted as a limitation to the embodiment of the present application. It can be understood that the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application may have more components than those shown in FIG. 7 , which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application. The method performed by the processor and the transceiver shown above is only an example, and for the specific steps performed by the processor and the transceiver, reference may be made to the method introduced above.
在另一种可能的实现方式中,图6所示的通信装置中,处理单元601可以是一个或多个逻辑电路,发送单元603可以是输出接口,接收单元602可以是输入接口。或者,该发送单元603和接收单元602可以集成于一个单元,例如输入输出接口。该输入输出接口,又或者称为通信接口,或者接口电路,或接口等等。如图8所示,图8所示的通信装置包括逻辑电路801和接口802。即上述处理单元601可以用逻辑电路801实现,接收单元602和发送单元603可以用接口802实现。其中,该逻辑电路801可以为芯片、处理电路、集成电路或片上系统(system on chip,SoC)芯片等,接口802可以为通信接口、输入输出接口、管脚等。示例性的,图8是以上述通信装置为芯片为例出的,该芯片包括逻辑电路801和接口802。In another possible implementation manner, in the communication device shown in FIG. 6 , the processing unit 601 may be one or more logic circuits, the sending unit 603 may be an output interface, and the receiving unit 602 may be an input interface. Alternatively, the sending unit 603 and the receiving unit 602 may be integrated into one unit, such as an input and output interface. The input-output interface is also called a communication interface, or an interface circuit, or an interface, or the like. As shown in FIG. 8 , the communication device shown in FIG. 8 includes a logic circuit 801 and an interface 802 . That is, the above-mentioned processing unit 601 can be realized by a logic circuit 801 , and the receiving unit 602 and the sending unit 603 can be realized by an interface 802 . Wherein, the logic circuit 801 may be a chip, a processing circuit, an integrated circuit or a system on chip (SoC) chip, etc., and the interface 802 may be a communication interface, an input/output interface, or a pin. Exemplarily, FIG. 8 takes the communication device as an example as a chip, and the chip includes a logic circuit 801 and an interface 802 .
本申请实施例中,逻辑电路和接口还可以相互耦合。对于逻辑电路和接口的具体连接方式,本申请实施例不作限定。In the embodiment of the present application, the logic circuit and the interface may also be coupled to each other. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific connection manner of the logic circuit and the interface.
示例性的,当通信装置用于执行上述标签执行的方法或功能或步骤时,接口802,用于输入第一消息和第二消息;接口802,还用于输出所述第三消息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the method or function or steps performed by the above tag, the interface 802 is used to input the first message and the second message; the interface 802 is also used to output the third message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接口802,还用于输入ACK消息,以及输出标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the interface 802 is also used to input an ACK message and output identification information.
可理解,逻辑电路801,用于根据输入的第一消息和第二消息获取第三消息。可选的,逻辑电路801,还用于根据输入的ACK消息获取标识信息。It can be understood that the logic circuit 801 is configured to obtain the third message according to the input first message and the second message. Optionally, the logic circuit 801 is further configured to acquire identification information according to the input ACK message.
示例性的,当通信装置用于执行上述阅读器执行的方法或功能或步骤时,逻辑电路801,用于获得配置信息,接口802,用于输出第一消息和第二消息,接口802,还用于输入第三消息。Exemplarily, when the communication device is used to execute the method or function or steps performed by the above reader, the logic circuit 801 is used to obtain configuration information, the interface 802 is used to output the first message and the second message, and the interface 802 is also used to input the third message.
可理解,逻辑电路801,可以用于获取第一消息和第二消息。It can be understood that the logic circuit 801 may be used to obtain the first message and the second message.
在一种可能的实现方式中,接口802,还用于输出ACK消息,以及输入标签的标识信息。In a possible implementation manner, the interface 802 is also configured to output an ACK message and input tag identification information.
可理解,逻辑电路801,可以用于获取ACK消息。It can be understood that the logic circuit 801 may be used to obtain the ACK message.
本申请各个实施例中,关于第一消息、第二消息、第三消息、第一编码方式、指示信息、第一序列、第二序列、参考序列等的说明还可以参考上文方法实施例中的介绍,这里不再一一详述。In each embodiment of the present application, for descriptions of the first message, the second message, the third message, the first encoding method, indication information, the first sequence, the second sequence, and the reference sequence, etc., reference may also be made to the introduction in the method embodiments above, and details will not be detailed here.
可理解,本申请实施例示出的通信装置可以采用硬件的形式实现本申请实施例提供的方法,也可以采用软件的形式实现本申请实施例提供的方法等,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that the communication device shown in the embodiment of the present application may implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of hardware, or may implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application in the form of software, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
对于图8所示的各个实施例的具体实现方式,还可以参考上述各个实施例,这里不再详述。For the specific implementation manners of the various embodiments shown in FIG. 8 , reference may also be made to the above-mentioned various embodiments, which will not be described in detail here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种无线通信系统,该无线通信系统包括标签和阅读器,该标签和该阅读器可以用于执行前述任一实施例中的方法。An embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system, the wireless communication system includes a tag and a reader, and the tag and the reader can be used to execute the method in any of the foregoing embodiments.
此外,本申请还提供一种计算机程序,该计算机程序用于实现本申请提供的方法中由标签执行的操作和/或处理。In addition, the present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the tag in the method provided in the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序,该计算机程序用于实现本申请提供的方法中由阅读器执行的操作和/或处理。The present application also provides a computer program, which is used to implement the operations and/or processing performed by the reader in the method provided in the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机代码,当计算机代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请提供的方法中由标签执行的操作和/或处理。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores computer codes, and when the computer codes run on the computer, the computer executes the operations and/or processing performed by the tag in the method provided by the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机代码,当计算机代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请提供的方法中由阅读器执行的操作 和/或处理。The present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which computer code is stored, and when the computer code is run on the computer, the computer is made to perform the operations and/or processing performed by the reader in the method provided by the present application.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机代码或计算机程序,当该计算机代码或计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得本申请提供的方法中由标签执行的操作和/或处理被执行。The present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer code or computer program, and when the computer code or computer program is run on the computer, the operation and/or processing performed by the tag in the method provided in the present application is executed.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机代码或计算机程序,当该计算机代码或计算机程序在计算机上运行时,使得本申请提供的方法中由阅读器执行的操作和/或处理被执行。The present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer code or computer program, and when the computer code or computer program is run on the computer, the operations and/or processing performed by the reader in the method provided in the present application are executed.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另外,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口、装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,也可以是电的,机械的或其它的形式连接。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may also be electrical, mechanical or other forms of connection.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本申请实施例提供的方案的技术效果。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to realize the technical effects of the solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以是两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated units can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software functional units.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分,或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个可读存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的可读存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit is realized in the form of a software function unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on such an understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or part of the contribution to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, the computer software product is stored in a readable storage medium, and includes several instructions to make a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the application. The above-mentioned readable storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other various media that can store program codes.
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific embodiment of the application, but the scope of protection of the application is not limited thereto. Anyone skilled in the art within the scope of the technology disclosed in this application can easily think of changes or replacements, which should be covered within the scope of protection of the application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be determined by the protection scope of the claims.
Claims (41)
- 一种基于无线射频识别RFID的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method based on radio frequency identification RFID, is characterized in that, described method comprises:标签接收第一消息,所述第一消息用于识别所述标签,所述第一消息包括指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述标签随机确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式;The tag receives a first message, where the first message is used to identify the tag, and the first message includes indication information, where the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine an encoding mode, or determine an encoding mode based on a sequence acquired by the tag, or determine an encoding mode based on received signal energy strength acquired by the tag;所述标签接收第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述标签上报序列;The tag receives a second message, and the second message is used to indicate the tag reporting sequence;所述标签基于第一编码方式向阅读器发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括第一序列。The tag sends a third message to the reader based on the first encoding method, and the third message includes the first sequence.
- 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1, further comprising:所述标签接收来自所述阅读器的确认ACK消息,所述ACK消息用于确认一个或多个所述第一序列;The tag receives a confirmation ACK message from the reader, the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences;所述标签基于所述第一编码方式向所述阅读器发送所述标签的标识信息。The tag sends the identification information of the tag to the reader based on the first encoding manner.
- 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述标签获取到的序列包括以下至少一项:The method according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the sequence obtained by the tag includes at least one of the following:所述第一序列、第二序列或参考序列。Said first sequence, second sequence or reference sequence.
- 根据权利要求1-3任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一编码方式基于如下任一项确定:The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the first encoding method is determined based on any of the following:所述第一编码方式基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the m and the n are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the i-th bit and the j-th bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the pth bit and the qth bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and the x and the y are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定;The first encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold;所述第一编码方式由所述标签随机确定。The first encoding manner is randomly determined by the label.
- 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定包括:The method according to claim 4, wherein the first encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold, comprising:在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=8; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than a second threshold and greater than or equal to a third threshold, the first encoding mode includes a Miller encoding mode with M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than a third threshold, the first encoding manner includes a Miller encoding manner with M=1.
- 根据权利要求1-5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序 列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the first message further includes at least one of starting position information, length information or a second sequence, the starting position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used for comparison with the second sequence, and the comparison result of the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- 根据权利要求1-6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一编码方式包括以下任一项:The method according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the first encoding method includes any of the following:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。M=1 Miller coding scheme, M=2 Miller coding scheme, M=4 Miller coding scheme, M=8 Miller coding scheme.
- 一种基于无线射频识别RFID的通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method based on radio frequency identification RFID, is characterized in that, described method comprises:阅读器发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于识别标签,所述第一消息包括指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述标签随机确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式;The reader sends a first message, the first message is used to identify the tag, and the first message includes indication information, the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine the encoding mode, or determine the encoding mode based on the sequence obtained by the tag, or determine the encoding mode based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the tag;所述阅读器发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述标签上报序列;The reader sends a second message, and the second message is used to indicate the tag reporting sequence;所述阅读器接收来自所述标签的第三消息,所述第三消息包括第一序列,所述第三消息的编码方式包括第一编码方式。The reader receives a third message from the tag, the third message includes the first sequence, and the encoding method of the third message includes the first encoding method.
- 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述阅读器接收来自所述标签的第三消息包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the reader receiving the third message from the tag comprises:所述阅读器接收至少两个所述标签发送的第三消息,至少两个所述标签发送第三消息时采用的编码方式不同。The reader receives the third messages sent by at least two of the tags, and at least two of the tags use different encoding methods when sending the third messages.
- 根据权利要求8或9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8 or 9, wherein the method further comprises:所述阅读器发送确认ACK消息,所述ACK消息用于确认一个或多个所述第一序列;The reader sends an acknowledgment ACK message, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences;所述阅读器接收所述标签的标识信息。The reader receives identification information of the tag.
- 根据权利要求8-10任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述标签获取到的序列包括以下至少一项:The method according to any one of claims 8-10, wherein the sequence obtained by the tag includes at least one of the following:所述第一序列、第二序列或参考序列。Said first sequence, second sequence or reference sequence.
- 根据权利要求8-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-11, wherein the indication information is used to indicate that determining the encoding method based on the sequence obtained from the tag includes:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定编码方式,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;或者,The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the m and the n are positive integers; or,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定编码方式,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;或者,The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the i-th bit and the j-th bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers; or,所述指示信息用于指示基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定编码方式,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;或者,The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the pth bit and the qth bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers; or,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定编码方式,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数。The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result of the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and the x and the y are positive integers.
- 根据权利要求8-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-11, wherein the indication information is used to indicate that determining the encoding method based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the tag includes:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式。The indication information is used to indicate to determine an encoding mode based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold.
- 根据权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式包括:The method according to claim 13, wherein determining the encoding method based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold comprises:在在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the coding scheme determined by the tag includes a Miller coding scheme with M=8; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold, the coding method determined by the label includes a Miller coding method with M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than a second threshold and greater than or equal to a third threshold, the encoding method determined by the label includes a Miller encoding method of M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the third threshold, the encoding manner determined by the tag includes a Miller encoding manner with M=1.
- 根据权利要求8-14任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。The method according to any one of claims 8-14, wherein the first message further includes at least one of starting position information, length information or a second sequence, the starting position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used for comparison with the second sequence, and a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- 根据权利要求8-15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述标签确定的编码方式包括以下任一项:The method according to any one of claims 8-15, wherein the encoding method determined by the label includes any of the following:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。M=1 Miller coding scheme, M=2 Miller coding scheme, M=4 Miller coding scheme, M=8 Miller coding scheme.
- 一种标签,其特征在于,所述标签包括:A label, characterized in that the label comprises:接收单元,用于接收第一消息,所述第一消息用于识别所述标签,所述第一消息包括指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述标签随机确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式;The receiving unit is configured to receive a first message, the first message is used to identify the tag, the first message includes indication information, and the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine the encoding mode, or determine the encoding mode based on the sequence obtained by the tag, or determine the encoding mode based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the tag;发送单元,用于接收第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述标签上报序列;a sending unit, configured to receive a second message, where the second message is used to indicate the label reporting sequence;所述发送单元,还用于基于第一编码方式向阅读器发送第三消息,所述第三消息包括第一序列。The sending unit is further configured to send a third message to the reader based on the first encoding method, where the third message includes the first sequence.
- 根据权利要求17所述的标签,其特征在于,The label according to claim 17, characterized in that,所述接收单元,还用于接收来自所述阅读器的确认ACK消息,所述ACK消息用于确认一个或多个所述第一序列;The receiving unit is further configured to receive an acknowledgment ACK message from the reader, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences;所述发送单元,还用于基于所述第一编码方式向所述阅读器发送所述标签的标识信息。The sending unit is further configured to send the identification information of the tag to the reader based on the first encoding method.
- 根据权利要求17或18所述的标签,其特征在于,所述标签获取到的序列包括以下至少一项:The tag according to claim 17 or 18, wherein the sequence acquired by the tag includes at least one of the following:所述第一序列、第二序列或参考序列。Said first sequence, second sequence or reference sequence.
- 根据权利要求17-19任一项所述的标签,其特征在于,所述第一编码方式基于如下任一项确定:The label according to any one of claims 17-19, wherein the first encoding method is determined based on any of the following:所述第一编码方式基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定,所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the m-th bit and the n-th bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the m and the n are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the i-th bit and the j-th bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the pth bit and the qth bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确 定,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数;The first encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and the x and the y are positive integers;所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定;The first encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold;所述第一编码方式由所述标签随机确定。The first encoding manner is randomly determined by the label.
- 根据权利要求20所述的标签,其特征在于,所述第一编码方式基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定包括:The tag according to claim 20, wherein the first encoding method is determined based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold value comprising:在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to a first threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=8; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold, the first coding method includes a Miller coding method with M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than a second threshold and greater than or equal to a third threshold, the first encoding mode includes a Miller encoding mode with M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述第一编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than a third threshold, the first encoding manner includes a Miller encoding manner with M=1.
- 根据权利要求17-21任一项所述的标签,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。The tag according to any one of claims 17-21, wherein the first message further includes at least one of starting position information, length information or a second sequence, the starting position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used for comparison with the second sequence, and a comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- 根据权利要求17-22任一项所述的标签,其特征在于,所述第一编码方式包括以下任一项:The label according to any one of claims 17-22, wherein the first encoding method includes any of the following:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。M=1 Miller coding scheme, M=2 Miller coding scheme, M=4 Miller coding scheme, M=8 Miller coding scheme.
- 一种阅读器,其特征在于,所述阅读器包括:A reader, characterized in that the reader includes:发送单元,用于发送第一消息,所述第一消息用于识别标签,所述第一消息包括指示信息,所述指示信息用于指示所述标签随机确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式,或者,基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式;A sending unit, configured to send a first message, where the first message is used to identify a tag, and the first message includes indication information, where the indication information is used to instruct the tag to randomly determine an encoding mode, or determine an encoding mode based on a sequence acquired by the tag, or determine an encoding mode based on received signal energy strength acquired by the tag;所述发送单元,还用于发送第二消息,所述第二消息用于指示所述标签上报序列;The sending unit is further configured to send a second message, where the second message is used to indicate the label reporting sequence;接收单元,用于接收来自所述标签的第三消息,所述第三消息包括第一序列,所述第三消息的编码方式包括第一编码方式。A receiving unit, configured to receive a third message from the tag, the third message includes the first sequence, and the coding method of the third message includes the first coding method.
- 根据权利要求24所述的阅读器,其特征在于,所述接收单元,具体用于接收至少两个所述标签发送的第三消息,至少两个所述标签发送第三消息时采用的编码方式不同。The reader according to claim 24, wherein the receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the third messages sent by at least two of the tags, and at least two of the tags use different encoding methods when sending the third messages.
- 根据权利要求24或25所述的阅读器,其特征在于,A reader according to claim 24 or 25, characterized in that,所述发送单元,还用于发送确认ACK消息,所述ACK消息用于确认一个或多个所述第一序列;The sending unit is further configured to send an acknowledgment ACK message, where the ACK message is used to confirm one or more of the first sequences;所述接收单元,还用于接收所述标签的标识信息。The receiving unit is further configured to receive the identification information of the tag.
- 根据权利要求24-26任一项所述的阅读器,其特征在于,所述标签获取到的序列包括以下至少一项:The reader according to any one of claims 24-26, wherein the sequence acquired by the tag includes at least one of the following:所述第一序列、第二序列或参考序列。Said first sequence, second sequence or reference sequence.
- 根据权利要求24-27任一项所述的阅读器,其特征在于,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的序列确定编码方式包括:The reader according to any one of claims 24-27, wherein the indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method determined based on the sequence obtained by the tag includes:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第一序列中的第m个比特和第n个比特确定编码方式, 所述m不等于所述n,所述m和所述n均小于或等于所述第一序列的长度,所述m和所述n为正整数;或者,The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the mth bit and the nth bit in the first sequence, the m is not equal to the n, the m and the n are both less than or equal to the length of the first sequence, and the m and the n are positive integers; or,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列中的第i个比特和第j个比特确定编码方式,所述i不等于所述j,所述i和所述j均小于或等于所述第二序列的长度,所述i和所述j为正整数;或者,The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the i-th bit and the j-th bit in the second sequence, the i is not equal to the j, the i and the j are both less than or equal to the length of the second sequence, and the i and the j are positive integers; or,所述指示信息用于指示基于参考序列中的第p个比特和第q个比特确定编码方式,所述p不等于所述q,所述p和所述q均小于或等于所述参考序列的长度,所述p和所述q为正整数;或者,The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the pth bit and the qth bit in the reference sequence, the p is not equal to the q, the p and the q are both less than or equal to the length of the reference sequence, and the p and the q are positive integers; or,所述指示信息用于指示基于第二序列和参考序列的比较结果中的第x个比特和第y个比特确定编码方式,所述x不等于所述y,所述x和所述y均小于或等于所述比较结果的长度,所述x和所述y为正整数。The indication information is used to indicate that the encoding method is determined based on the xth bit and the yth bit in the comparison result between the second sequence and the reference sequence, the x is not equal to the y, the x and the y are both less than or equal to the length of the comparison result, and the x and the y are positive integers.
- 根据权利要求24-28任一项所述的阅读器,其特征在于,所述指示信息用于指示基于所述标签获取到的接收信号能量强度确定编码方式包括:The reader according to any one of claims 24-28, wherein the indication information is used to indicate that determining the encoding method based on the received signal energy strength obtained by the tag includes:所述指示信息用于指示基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式。The indication information is used to indicate to determine an encoding mode based on a comparison result between the received signal energy strength of the second message and a preset threshold.
- 根据权利要求29所述的阅读器,其特征在于,基于所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度与预设阈值的比较结果确定编码方式包括:The reader according to claim 29, wherein determining the encoding method based on the comparison result of the received signal energy strength of the second message with a preset threshold comprises:在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度大于或等于第一阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=8的米勒编码方式;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is greater than or equal to the first threshold, the coding scheme determined by the label includes a Miller coding scheme with M=8; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第一阈值,且大于或等于第二阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=4的米勒编码方式,所述第一阈值大于所述第二阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the first threshold and greater than or equal to the second threshold, the coding method determined by the label includes a Miller coding method with M=4, and the first threshold is greater than the second threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第二阈值,且大于或等于第三阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=2的米勒编码方式,所述第二阈值大于所述第三阈值;或者,In the case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than a second threshold and greater than or equal to a third threshold, the encoding method determined by the label includes a Miller encoding method of M=2, and the second threshold is greater than the third threshold; or,在所述第二消息的接收信号能量强度小于第三阈值的情况下,所述标签确定的编码方式包括M=1的米勒编码方式。In a case where the received signal energy strength of the second message is less than the third threshold, the encoding manner determined by the tag includes a Miller encoding manner with M=1.
- 根据权利要求25-30任一项所述的阅读器,其特征在于,所述第一消息还包括起始位置信息、长度信息或第二序列中的至少一项,所述起始位置信息和所述长度信息用于确定参考序列,所述参考序列用于与所述第二序列进行比较,且所述参考序列和所述第二序列的比较结果用于识别所述标签。The reader according to any one of claims 25-30, wherein the first message further includes at least one of starting position information, length information or a second sequence, the starting position information and the length information are used to determine a reference sequence, the reference sequence is used for comparison with the second sequence, and the comparison result between the reference sequence and the second sequence is used to identify the tag.
- 根据权利要求25-31任一项所述的阅读器,其特征在于,所述标签确定的编码方式包括以下任一项:The reader according to any one of claims 25-31, wherein the encoding method determined by the label includes any of the following:M=1的米勒编码方式、M=2的米勒编码方式、M=4的米勒编码方式、M=8的米勒编码方式。M=1 Miller coding scheme, M=2 Miller coding scheme, M=4 Miller coding scheme, M=8 Miller coding scheme.
- 一种第二通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器;A second communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and a memory;所述存储器用于存储指令;The memory is used to store instructions;所述处理器用于执行所述指令,以使权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法被执行。The processor is configured to execute the instructions, so that the method described in any one of claims 1-7 is executed.
- 一种第一通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器和存储器;A first communication device, characterized by comprising a processor and a memory;所述存储器用于存储指令;The memory is used to store instructions;所述处理器用于执行所述指令,以使权利要求8-16任一项所述的方法被执行。The processor is configured to execute the instructions, so that the method described in any one of claims 8-16 is performed.
- 一种第二通信装置,其特征在于,包括逻辑电路和接口,所述逻辑电路和接口耦合;A second communication device, characterized in that it includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit is coupled to the interface;所述接口用于输入和/或输出代码指令,所述逻辑电路用于执行所述代码指令,以使权利 要求1-7任一项所述的方法被执行。The interface is used to input and/or output code instructions, and the logic circuit is used to execute the code instructions, so that the method described in any one of claims 1-7 is executed.
- 一种第一通信装置,其特征在于,包括逻辑电路和接口,所述逻辑电路和接口耦合;A first communication device, characterized in that it includes a logic circuit and an interface, and the logic circuit and the interface are coupled;所述接口用于输入和/或输出代码指令,所述逻辑电路用于执行所述代码指令,以使权利要求8-16任一项所述的方法被执行。The interface is used to input and/or output code instructions, and the logic circuit is used to execute the code instructions, so that the method described in any one of claims 8-16 is executed.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被执行时,权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1-7 is executed.
- 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被执行时,权利要求8-16任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 8-16 is executed.
- 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,所述计算机程序被执行时,如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer program, wherein when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1-7 is executed.
- 一种计算机程序,其特征在于,所述计算机程序被执行时,如权利要求8-16任一项所述的方法被执行。A computer program, wherein when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 8-16 is executed.
- 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括第一通信装置和第二通信装置,所述第二通信装置用于执行如权利要求1-7任一项所述的方法,所述第一通信装置用于执行如权利要求8-16任一项所述的方法。A communication system, characterized by comprising a first communication device and a second communication device, the second communication device is used to execute the method according to any one of claims 1-7, and the first communication device is used to execute the method according to any one of claims 8-16.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN202210061629.1 | 2022-01-19 | ||
CN202210061629.1A CN116502655A (en) | 2022-01-19 | 2022-01-19 | Communication method and device based on wireless radio frequency identification |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2023138409A1 true WO2023138409A1 (en) | 2023-07-27 |
Family
ID=87320752
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/CN2023/070947 WO2023138409A1 (en) | 2022-01-19 | 2023-01-06 | Communication method and apparatus based on wireless radio-frequency identification |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CN (1) | CN116502655A (en) |
WO (1) | WO2023138409A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117195934A (en) * | 2023-11-07 | 2023-12-08 | 双胞胎(集团)股份有限公司 | Ear tag tracking method and breeding data acquisition method |
Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100060424A1 (en) * | 2008-03-19 | 2010-03-11 | Checkpoint Systems, Inc. | Range Extension and Multiple Access in Modulated Backscatter Systems |
CN103562751A (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2014-02-05 | 梁中明 | Methods and apparatuses for the simultaneous detection of multiple radio frequency identification tags |
CN104766032A (en) * | 2015-01-23 | 2015-07-08 | 北京信息科技大学 | Q parameter realizing method capable of simultaneously recognizing multiple labels based on multiple receiving antennas |
CN106940779A (en) * | 2016-01-04 | 2017-07-11 | 常州浅湾电子科技有限公司 | A kind of efficient RFID tag identification method |
CN111523337A (en) * | 2020-04-21 | 2020-08-11 | 中煤科工集团重庆研究院有限公司 | Anti-collision method based on label serial number sliding window iterative grouping |
-
2022
- 2022-01-19 CN CN202210061629.1A patent/CN116502655A/en active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-01-06 WO PCT/CN2023/070947 patent/WO2023138409A1/en unknown
Patent Citations (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100060424A1 (en) * | 2008-03-19 | 2010-03-11 | Checkpoint Systems, Inc. | Range Extension and Multiple Access in Modulated Backscatter Systems |
CN103562751A (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2014-02-05 | 梁中明 | Methods and apparatuses for the simultaneous detection of multiple radio frequency identification tags |
CN104766032A (en) * | 2015-01-23 | 2015-07-08 | 北京信息科技大学 | Q parameter realizing method capable of simultaneously recognizing multiple labels based on multiple receiving antennas |
CN106940779A (en) * | 2016-01-04 | 2017-07-11 | 常州浅湾电子科技有限公司 | A kind of efficient RFID tag identification method |
CN111523337A (en) * | 2020-04-21 | 2020-08-11 | 中煤科工集团重庆研究院有限公司 | Anti-collision method based on label serial number sliding window iterative grouping |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN117195934A (en) * | 2023-11-07 | 2023-12-08 | 双胞胎(集团)股份有限公司 | Ear tag tracking method and breeding data acquisition method |
CN117195934B (en) * | 2023-11-07 | 2024-02-20 | 双胞胎(集团)股份有限公司 | Ear tag tracking method and breeding data acquisition method |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CN116502655A (en) | 2023-07-28 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US8427315B2 (en) | Ahead-of-time scheduling of commands in RFID reader systems | |
US7612672B2 (en) | Query tree based tag identification method in RFID systems | |
US8362879B2 (en) | Apparatus and method for integrated reader and tag | |
US7982584B2 (en) | Mobile RFID reader and control method thereof | |
US8154385B2 (en) | Local processing of received RFID tag responses | |
US7999675B2 (en) | RFID tags replying using changed reply timing | |
EP1818852B1 (en) | Interrogator, transponder and transponder identification method | |
US8063740B1 (en) | Interfacing to RFID reader utility that causes RFID tags to reply using changed reply timing | |
US20070236331A1 (en) | Preventing timeout of RFID tag in timed state of air-interface protocol | |
US8134451B1 (en) | RFID tag chips and tags capable of backscattering more codes and methods | |
CN103514464A (en) | RFID multi-label read-write identification method and device based on multiple channels | |
US8717147B2 (en) | Passive RFID system and method | |
WO2023138409A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus based on wireless radio-frequency identification | |
US9715605B1 (en) | Weak RFID tag signal recovery from collisions | |
Lee et al. | Analysis of RFID anti-collision algorithms using smart antennas | |
CN107832649B (en) | Label inventory method and equipment | |
US20240305431A1 (en) | Modified rfid tag inventorying process | |
EP2431909A1 (en) | Method and system for counting tags in radio frequency identification system | |
US11120232B2 (en) | Early collision detection and handling in CDMA-based RFID systems | |
WO2023138408A1 (en) | Communication device and communication method based on radio frequency identification (rfid) | |
WO2023236907A1 (en) | Information indication method, terminal, network side device, and readable storage medium | |
WO2023103782A1 (en) | Communication method and communication device | |
WO2023103904A1 (en) | Method and apparatus for transmitting data | |
CN116362271B (en) | RFID tag identification method for realizing double standards | |
WO2024041309A1 (en) | Communication method and apparatus |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 23742724 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |